Samsung 3WAY COMBINATIONTELEVISION User manual

4 G
L T E
S M A R T P H O N E
User Manual
Please read this manual before operating your
phone, and keep it for future reference.
Intellectual Property
All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers
relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone
System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual
Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software,
computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the
rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare
derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No
title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain
with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.
Open Source Software
Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser
General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered
under the open source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsung.com.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR
ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR
COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING
SM-N900A_UM_English_MI9_WC_092713_F4
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS
OR BENEFITS.
Modification of Software
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR
CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE, SUCH AS CUSTOM OS.
SAFE™ (Samsung Approved For Enterprise)
SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own
internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes field
testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the
Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as
described by the third party security solution providers. The testing, for example, includes field testing with local network
connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. For more
information about Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe.
Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE
FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND
THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™
DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In
addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other
things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider,
solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole
discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security
protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited
warranty, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab™
devices are sold. [101212]
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC
Headquarters:
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, TX 75082
Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Internet Address:
http://www.samsung.com
©2013 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone? For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS
System (Automated Response System) at: http://www.samsung.com/us/support.
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.
LTE is a trademark of ETSI.
and
are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under license
from SRS Labs, Inc.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google
Hangouts, Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.
Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make
any modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is
required on all voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices
or plans may require you to subscribe to a data plan.
Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be
aware that some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available
through AT&T, AT&T offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other
phones on your account. However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the
terms and conditions and the associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be
used and protected.
Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or
elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These
controls may not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls.
AT&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to
improve its services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit http://www.att.com/privacy.
Your phone features earSmart™, an intelligent voice processor that delivers a clear voice experience, allowing you to hear and be
heard™ in nearly any environment. earSmart technology uses the science of human hearing to distinguish sounds, identify your
voice and suppress surrounding noise, for clear conversations just about anywhere.
How Does It Work?
• The earSmart voice processor in your phone captures your voice and all the sounds around you.
• Working like the human ear, it processes and distinguishes these sounds, isolates your voice conversation, and removes background noise from both ends of a call.
• It also automatically equalizes and adjusts voice volume so you can hear and talk naturally, even in the noisiest places.
• With earSmart technology, you can talk where you want, and have clear conversations for mobile calls, video chats, even speakerphone calls,
without worrying about surrounding noise.
Table of Contents
Section 1: Getting Started ............................. 6
Setting Up Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Charging a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Switching the Phone On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen . . . . . . 11
Configuring your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Creating a Samsung Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Setting Up Your Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone ........ 14
Features of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side Views of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Multi Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing Your Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notification Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
14
15
16
17
18
24
28
32
37
42
Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Section 3: Call Functions .............................49
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Making Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Making a Call Using Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Making a Call from the Address Book . . . . . . . . . 51
Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Call Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Options During a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Section 4: Contacts and Your Address
Book ..........................................................61
AT&T Address Book Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Adding a New Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Editing an Existing Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Using Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Linking Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Synchronizing Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Address Book Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Address Book Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Managing Address Book Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Section 5: Pictures and Videos ....................74
Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Camera Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Quick Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Camera and Camcorder Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Editing a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Section 6: Changing Your Settings ..............85
Accessing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Settings Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Wi-Fi Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tethering & portable hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Airplane mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Data Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Location services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
More networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
S Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Nearby devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Screen Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Multi window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
LED indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Lock Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Notification Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Easy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Blocking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Language and input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Hands-free Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
S Pen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
One-handed operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Motions and Gestures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
2
Add Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup and reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Browser Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power saving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
125
126
127
127
128
130
130
131
131
136
Section 7: Messaging ................................ 139
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messaging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing New Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hangouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
139
139
140
143
144
144
144
147
149
150
151
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
AT&T Messages App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
ChatON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Section 8: Connections ..............................153
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Section 9: Applications ..............................163
Application Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Action Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
AT&T Code Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
AT&T DriveMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
AT&T FamilyMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
AT&T Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
AT&T Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
AT&T Ready2Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
ChatON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Device Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Flipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Google . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Google Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Group Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Hangouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Lookout Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Messages (AT&T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Mobile Hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
My Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
myAT&T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
PEN.UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Play Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Play Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Play Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Play Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Polaris Office 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
S Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
S Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
S Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
S Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Samsung Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Samsung Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Samsung Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Scrapbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
4
198
198
198
199
199
200
200
201
205
206
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . 226
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . 229
Section 10: Health and Safety
Information ............................................. 207
Section 11: Warranty Information .............231
SketchBook for Galaxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Story Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TripAdvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WatchON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YPmobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . .
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Part 15 Information to User . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) . . .
Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . .
UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
207
212
214
214
214
216
218
219
219
220
Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
End User License Agreement for Software . . . . . 236
Section 12: Samsung Product
Registration .............................................244
Index ............................................................245
Section 1: Getting Started
This section explains how to start using your phone by first
configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then
setting up your voice mail.
2. Lift the cover up (2) and to the right of the phone.
Setting Up Your Phone
Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM
into their corresponding internal compartments. The
microSD™ card slot is also located in this same internal
area.
1. Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into
the slot on the top of your phone (1).
Caution! Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively.
Doing so may damage the cover.
Installing the SIM Card
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided
with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details,
such as your PIN, available optional services, and many
others features.
Getting Started
6
Important! The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts
can be easily damaged by scratching or bending,
so be careful when handling, inserting, or
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach
of small children.
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket
(as shown) until the card locks into place.
• Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone
and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned
as shown.
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not
detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot
if the SIM is not detected.
Installing the Battery
1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the
phone, making sure the connectors align (1).
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).
Removing and Installing the Memory Card
You can use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC card to
expand available memory space if you desire. This secure
digital card enables you to exchange images, music, and
7
data between SD-compatible devices. This type of memory
card is designed for use with this mobile phone and other
devices.
Note: Your phone has been tested to support up to a 64GB
memory card.
Installing the Memory Card
Removing the Memory Card
1. Push on the memory card until it clicks and is released.
2. Grasp the memory card and remove it from the phone.
Installing the Back Cover
1. Place the battery cover onto the back of the phone (1)
and press down (2).
Push the microSD card into the slot until it clicks (as
shown).
• Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and
the card is securely inserted.
For more information on Memory Cards, see “Memory Card”
on page 43.
Getting Started
8
2. Press along the edge of the back cover (3) until you
have a secure seal.
Note: You must fully charge the battery before using your
phone for the first time. A discharged battery recharges
fully in approximately 4 hours.
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate
mode, web browser use, and other variables may
reduce the battery’s talk and standby times.
Although you can use the phone while the battery is
charging, doing so will require additional charging time.
Note: Make sure the battery is properly installed before
switching on the phone.
Charging a Battery
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The
USB 3.0 Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is
included with your device. Use only Samsung-approved
batteries and chargers.
9
Using the Travel Charger
Important! Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to
connection. If the battery is not properly installed
and the wall charger is connected, the handset
may power off and on continuously, preventing
proper operation.
1. Plug the flat end of the USB 3.0 Travel Charger into the
Power/Accessory Interface connector and the other
end into the Travel adapter. Plug the Travel adapter into
a standard AC wall outlet.
2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from
the interface connector jack on the phone.
Note: Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious
damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is
not covered by the warranty.
Note: Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the
battery, can cause damage to the phone.
3. If you are using the older style USB 2.0 Travel Charger
to charge your battery, plug the flat end of the Travel
Charger into the port on the right side as shown below.
Getting Started
10
Low Battery Indicator
When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time
remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the device sounds a
warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your
phone conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning
off the backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a
quick check of your battery level, glance at the battery
charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your
device’s display. Solid color ( ) indicates a full charge.
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone
automatically turns off.
Switching the Phone On or Off
1. On the top right side of your phone, press and hold
until the phone switches on.
2. Swipe your finger across the screen to unlock the
phone.
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory.
To change the language, use the Language menu. For
more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 85.
11
3. To switch off the phone, press and hold
until the Device options screen displays.
,
4. Tap Power off to switch off the phone.
5. At the Power off prompt, tap OK.
Locking and Unlocking the Touch
Screen
1. When your phone is on, press
touch screen and turn off the display.
to lock the
2. Press
again to display the lock screen then
swipe your finger across the screen to unlock.
Note: Swipe is the default screen locking method. To change
your screen lock, see “Lock Screen Settings” on
page 100.
Warning! Please note that a touch screen responds best to a
light touch from the pad of your finger. Using
excessive force or a metallic object when pressing
on the touch screen may damage the tempered
glass surface and void the warranty. For more
information, refer to “Standard Limited Warranty”
on page 231.
Configuring your Phone
When you first turn on your phone, you will need to set up a
few things.
1. When you first turn on your phone, the Let’s set up your
device! screen displays.
2. The default language for your phone is English. If you
would like to select Spanish, tap Español on the bottom
right-hand side of the screen.
3. Tap Terms & Conditions, read the End User License
Agreement for Ready2Go, then tap Back.
Touch Remind Later to configure your phone later. You
can access Ready2Go from the Home screen by
tapping Applications
➔ AT&T Ready2Go
.
5. Read and follow the instructions on each screen to set
up your phone.
Creating a Samsung Account
An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing
applications such as ChatON and Samsung Hub. If you did
not create a Samsung account when you first set up your
phone, follow these steps:
➔
1. From the home screen, tap
➔ Settings
General ➔ Accounts ➔ Add account.
General
2. Tap
Samsung account.
3. Tap Create new account.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to create and
activate your account.
4. Tap get started.
– or –
Getting Started
12
Creating a New Google Account
In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will
need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your
device. With a Google Account, Google applications will
always be in sync between your phone and computer.
If you did not create a new account during the setup
procedure when you first turned your phone on, follow these
steps:
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Gmail
The Add a Google Account screen displays.
2. Tap New to create a new Google account.
– or –
If you already have a Google account, tap Existing to
sign in and add the account to your phone.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a Google
Account.
Note: Once you have created a Google account, you only need
to sign in.
13
Setting Up Your Voice Mail
1. From the Home screen, tap
, then tap
.
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a
greeting, and record your name.
Note: These steps may be different depending on your
network.
Accessing Your Voice Mail
1. From the Home screen, tap
, then tap
.
You may be prompted to enter a password.
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the
voice mail center.
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the
asterisk key on the phone you are using.
3. Enter your password.
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone
This section outlines some key features of your phone and
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the phone
is in use.
Features of Your Phone
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many
useful features. The following list outlines a few of the
features included in your phone.
• 4G LTE network with 2.3 gigahertz quad-core processor
• Android v 4.3, Jelly Bean Platform
• Brilliant 5.7” Full HD Super AMOLED® screen (1920 x 1080)
• Touch screen provides quick response to a variety of in-phone
menus and options
• Galaxy Gear™ compliant. For more information, please visit:
www.samsung.com/us/galaxygearsupport
• Smart Switch™ compliant. For more information, see
www.samsungsmartswitch.com
• Ready access to the Internet
• Built-in 4.0 Bluetooth and advanced Wi-Fi® 802.11 a/g/n/ac
(HT80) technology
• USB 3.0 Tethering-capable
• Mobile Hotspot capability
• 13 Megapixel camera and camcorder with 2 Megapixel Front
Facing camera with Smart Stabilization
• AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation
• High speed download capability
• Up to 64 GB expandable memory slot
• Corporate and Personal Email
• Sync and update social network applications
• Apps available to download via Google Play Store™
• Access Movies, TV Shows, Music, Games, and Books with
Samsung Hub™
• Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube,
Google Maps, Google Voice Search)
• Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and
Instant Messaging with Google Hangouts
• Video with Full HD 1080p recording and playback
• Samsung Link to share your media content across DLNA certified
devices
Understanding Your Phone
14
Front View of Your Phone
14
1. Status light: displays red when charging or the battery
is low, blue when a notification has arrived or you are
voice recording, and green when fully charged.
13
2. External speaker: allows you to hear the caller.
1
12
2
11
10
5
6
7
4. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important
features such as Phone, Contacts, Messaging, Internet,
and Apps.
9
5. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with
additional options for different features and
applications such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts,
Messages, and Internet.
8
6. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home
screen from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold
to display Recent apps, Task Manager, and Google
Search. Quickly press twice to activate the S Voice
application. Press once from the main Home screen to
launch My Magazine feature.
3
4
3. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your
favorite applications on the Home screen.
7. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating
a menu or web page.
15
8. Home screen indicator: shows which Home screen is
presently displayed.
Side Views of Your Phone
1
9. Google Quick Search bar: a shortcut to Google Search
that allows you to search for items on the internet.
10. AccuWeather screen: displays Time, Day, Date,
Temperature and weather conditions for your area.
7
6
2
11. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to
operate your phone, such as the received signal
strength, phone battery level, time, unread Emails,
missed calls, etc.
5
12. Front facing camera: allows you to take pictures of
yourself when you set the camera shooting mode to
Self shot.
13. Proximity and Light sensors: uses the ambient light
level to make adjustments. If the light path is blocked,
for example, when holding the phone close to your ear,
the touch screen will turn off.
14. Gestures Sensor used to detect Gesture motions.
3
4
Understanding Your Phone
16
1. 3.5mm Headset jack: allows you to plug in headphones.
2. Volume keys: allow you to adjust the ringer volume
while in standby mode or adjust the voice volume
during a call. When receiving an incoming call, briefly
press down either volume key (
) to mute
the ring tone. Adjusts text size when reading a
message.
7. Microphone: used for noise cancellation and stereo
recording.
Rear View of Your Phone
1
4
3. Microphone: allows other callers to hear you when you
are speaking to them. It is also used for the
Speakerphone.
4. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to
connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories
such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for
convenient, hands-free conversations.
5. Power/Lock key: (
) lets you power your
phone on and off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the
touch screen. For more information on locking your
phone, see “Locking and Unlocking the Phone” on
page 30.
1. Camera lens: is used to take pictures and shoot videos.
6. Infrared Blaster: Used to emit infrared signals used for
controlling external devices.
2. S Pen: a stylus that assists you in performing different
functions.
17
2
3
3. External speaker: allows you to hear when the
Speakerphone is turned on.
4. Flash: is used to provide adequate light when taking
pictures in dark places.
S Pen
The S Pen is a stylus that assists you in performing different
functions. By using the Pen button, you can minimize having
to switch between touch and pen input.
Removing the S Pen from your Phone
The S Pen is stored in your phone to make it easier to keep
track of.
To remove the S Pen, follow these steps:
1. Use your fingernail or a sharp object to pull the end of
the S Pen out of the phone (1).
1
2
1. Pen button: by pressing the Pen button, you can add
functionality to the S Pen. For more information, refer
to “Using the S Pen” on page 19.
2. Stylus tip: the tip of the S Pen is used for tapping the
screen.
2. Pull the S Pen out of the phone (2).
Understanding Your Phone
18
Using the S Pen
There are several different functions you can perform by
using the S Pen.
Air Command Toolbar
Once removed from its slot, S Pen shows an on-screen Air
Command button toolbar that allows you to quickly activate
frequently used applications or actions.
3. Use the on-screen pop up page to enter in text and
numbers.
4. Select
(Select content), circle the action memo
content, and from the application toolbar, select an
available application (such as Contacts).
5. The new content is then copied into your selected
application.
Scrap booker Screen Write
Action Memo
S Finder
Pen Window
Application
Toolbar
S Pen - Using Action Memo
1. Remove the S Pen from its slot.
– or –
Hover over the screen and press the S Pen button.
2. From the Air Command menu, select
Memo).
19
Action Memo
Toolbar
(Action
S Pen - Using Scrapbooker
1. Remove the S Pen from its slot.
2. Navigate to your target
medium, such as a Youtube
video, document, or image.
9. Tap
10. Tap
(Save) to save your new entry.
➔ Scrapbook
to access your scrapbook.
S Pen - Using Screen Write
1. Remove the S Pen from its slot.
2. Hover over the screen and press the S Pen button.
3. Hover over the screen and
press the S Pen button.
3. From the Air Command menu, select
Write).
4. From the Air Command menu,
select
(Scrap booker).
4. The current on-screen elements are shot and then
displayed as an editable image.
5. In a single motion, press and
hold the S Pen button then
quickly draw a freeform
enclosed shape on the screen
to select the area you want to capture into your
Scrapbook.
5. Tap
to open the Pen settings menu and adjust the
pen color and thickness.
6. Select the Scrapbook option. The image is copied into
your clipboard.
7. From the top drop-down menu, select the target
scrapbook into which to place the current selection.
8. Enter a memo and tag that can be assigned/attached
to your selection.
6. Begin to write on the image and tap
store the new image.
(Screen
(Save) to
Results are stored in the My Files ➔ All ➔ Device
storage ➔ Pictures ➔ Screenshots folder.
S Pen Using S Finder
1. Remove the S Pen from its slot.
2. Hover over the screen and press the S Pen button.
3. From the Air Command menu, select
and use the on-screen search tools.
(S Finder)
Understanding Your Phone
20
S Pen - Using Pen Window
S Pen - Using Smart Clip
This feature allows you to draw an on-screen window and
then populate the drawn area a target application,
1. Remove the S Pen from its slot.
2. Hover over the screen and press the S Pen button.
3. From the Air Command menu, select
Window).
(Pen
4. Locate an on-screen area and use the S Pen to draw
out a rectangular shaped window.
5. Select an available application. The desired app then
appears within the drawn area.
Pen window
Instantly outline and crop images displayed on the screen in
any shape to share or paste with Smart Clip. Once desired
image is selected, users can freely edit the cropped content,
or personalize with their own handwriting.
To take a selective screen capture:
Note: These steps allow you to capture selected areas of a
screen based on a freehand area drawn on-screen.
1. Grasp the pen.
2. In a single motion, press and hold the S Pen button then
quickly draw a freeform enclosed shape on the screen
to select the area you want to capture.
Note: The shape you draw must be completed by ending over
the same point at which you started. This creates a
closed shape.
3. After a second, confirm the newly captured image
appears on-screen.
21
Note: Additional options are available by scrolling left across
the bottom of the screen.
Smart Clip
Toolbar
Application
Toolbar
Screen Capture
To take a screen capture, hold the S Pen button and press
and hold the S Pen anywhere on the screen. Files are saved
in the Apps ➔ My Files ➔ All ➔ Device storage ➔ Pictures
➔ Screenshots folder. You can also find them in your Gallery
in the Screenshots album.
Press and Hold
S Pen button
4. Select a destination for the newly captured image from
the bottom of the screen. Tap one of the following
options: Scrapbook, Email, Messaging, ChatON, AT&T
Locker, Bluetooth, Flipboard, Gmail, Google+,
Hangouts, PEN.UP, Picasa, S Note, or Wi-Fi Direct.
Understanding Your Phone
22
Write on any Screen after Capture
To write on a screen capture, use the pen to draw or write.
Files are saved in the Apps ➔ My Files ➔ All ➔ Device
storage ➔ Pictures ➔ Screenshots folder.
Air view
When you hold the S Pen near the screen, a pointer appears
on the screen. Move the pointer to files, subjects, or options
to preview the contents or view information in pop-up
windows.
You can scroll through panels or lists by moving the pointer
to an edge (top/bottom/left/right) of the screen.
S Pen Input
Draw or Write
Instead of using the keyboard, you can use the S Pen Input
feature to allow for handwriting input. When the S Pen hovers
above a text input area, a Handwriting field is provided. You
can use S Pen Input in many functions such as Messages,
Email, Dialer, Calculator, Calendar, etc.
In the following example, the S Pen Input feature is used for
sending a message.
1. Hover the S Pen over the area you would like to write
on.
2. Tap the
icon with the S Pen.
3. Use the S Pen to write.
23
3. Press and hold the S Pen button to reveal some of your
most used items, contents, or text strings.
4. Make a selection.
Display Layout
Your display screen provides a wealth of information about
the phone’s status and options, as well as providing access
to application icons. For more information, refer to “Front
View of Your Phone” on page 15.
Indicator Icons
Air Button
The S Pen displays a menu via the Air Button interaction for
different applicable contents.
1. Remove the S Pen from its slot.
2. Launch an application that contains an attachment or
selection field such as:
• Attachment button within Messages or Email: provides a list of
the most recently used
• Recipient selector within Messages or Email
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s
display and Indicator area:
Displays your current signal strength. The greater
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You
cannot send or receive any calls or access online
information.
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.
Displays when there is no network available.
• Enter message filed within Messages
Understanding Your Phone
24
Displays when your phone is in Blocking mode.
Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is
fully charged.
Displays when there is a system error or alert.
Displays when your battery is charging. Also
displays battery charge level.
Displays when the S pen has been removed from
the phone.
Device Power Low – Shows your current battery
only has between 15 and 28 percent power
remaining.
Displays when a call is in progress.
Displays when a call is on hold.
Displays when the speakerphone is on.
Displays when a call has been missed.
Device Power Very Low – Shows your current
battery only has between 5 and 15 percent power
remaining.
Device Power Critical – Shows your current battery
only has less than 5 percent power remaining and
will immediately shutdown.
Displays when your connection to an EDGE network
is active.
Displays when a call has been muted.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the EDGE network.
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always
forward. For more information, refer to “Call
Settings” on page 105.
25
Displays when your connection to a UTMS, HSDPA,
HSPA, or HSPA+ network is active.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network.
Displays when your connection to a 4G LTE network
is active.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the 4G LTE network.
Displays when your phone is downloading or has
downloaded a file. It will blink green when it is
installing.
Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in
progress.
Displays when the phone is connected to a
computer via a supported USB 2.0 cable
connection.
Displays when the phone is connected to a
computer via a supported USB 3.0 cable
connection.
Displays when the phone is tethered via a
supported USB cable connection.
Displays when a new text or multimedia message
is received.
Displays when a new voice mail is received.
Displays when a Play Store download has
completed.
Displays when Email is received.
Displays when updates are available for download.
Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event
has arrived. For more information, refer to
“Calendar” on page 168.
Displays when Hangout updates are available for
download.
Displays when you set an alarm to ring at a specified
time. For more information, refer to “Alarm” on page
170.
Understanding Your Phone
26
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Mute.
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Vibrate.
Displays when your device is currently sharing/
streaming media to a paired device using the
Samsung Link application.
Displays when GPS is active and acquiring a signal.
Displays when Bluetooth is activated.
Displays when a Bluetooth device has been paired
with the phone.
Displays when data synchronization and
application sync is active and synchronization is in
progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
Displays when your phone is connecting to the
Device Management server when you first turn on
your phone.
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a
communication issue with the target Wireless
Access Point (WAP).
Displays when your device is connected being used
to control streaming media and is connected to a
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified
device using the AllShare Play application.
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and your phone
is connected to another device.
Displays when your phone as been configured as a
portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
27
Displays when TTY device has been inserted.
Displays when a screen capture has been taken.
Displays when the keypad is active.
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see
“Changing Your Settings” on page 85.
Google Search Bar
The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet
search engine powered by Google™.
1. From the main home screen, tap the Google Search bar
.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want
to search for, then tap
.
3. Tap
to use Google Voice Search. Follow the
on-screen instructions.
Menu Navigation
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs
using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and
features can be accessed by scrolling through the available
on-screen menus. Your phone originally has three home
screens but you can expand up to seven home screens.
Command Keys
Menu Key
Press
Menu to display a context-sensitive menu of
options for the current screen or feature.
Home Key
Press
Home to display the main Home screen. Press
and hold to display recently used apps and access the Task
manager.
Back Key
Press
step.
Back to return to the previous screen, option or
Terms used in this user manual
Tap
Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example:
• Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text.
• Tap a menu item to select it.
• Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.
Touch and Hold
Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For
example:
• Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.
Understanding Your Phone
28
• Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.
Swipe and Palm Swipe
To swipe, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally
across the screen. Use swipe when:
• Unlocking the screen
• Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu
To palm swipe, swipe the side of your hand horizontally
across the screen. Use palm swipe when:
• Capturing the screen
Panning
To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the device
to the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must
first activate Motion on your device. Use panning to:
• Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to
another page.
Tilt
To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the
screen then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or
enlarge the screen. Use tilt to:
• Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser.
29
Turn over
Turn your phone over so that the screen faces downward. For
example:
• Mute incoming calls and playing sounds by turning your phone
over.
Using Gestures
By activating the various gesture features within the Motion
Settings menu, you can access a variety of time saving
functions.
To activate motion:
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings ➔
Controls ➔ Motions.
Controls
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
screen to activate motions.
located at the top of the
3. Tap the ON/OFF icon
located to the right of
each motion option to activate it.
Caution! Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause
unintended results.
The following is a description of the available gestures:
• Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the
device to your ear.
• Smart alert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and
notified of you have missed any calls or messages.
• Zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content can
be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points on the
display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out.
• Browse an image: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired onscreen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to pan
horizontally or up and down to pan vertically around the large
on-screen image.
• Mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any playing
sounds by turning the device display down on a surface. This is
the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture.
For more information, refer to “Motions and Gestures” on
page 120.
Locking and Unlocking the Phone
To unlock your phone:
1. Press the lock button
right side of your phone.
located on the upper
2. The lock screen will display with Swipe screen to
unlock displayed at the bottom of the screen.
3. Swipe the touch screen in any direction.
4. The Home screen will display.
Note: There are several additional ways you can lock your
screen. For more information, refer to “Lock Screen
Settings” on page 100.
Navigating Through the Home Screens
Your phone originally has three home screens but you can
expand up to seven home screens. If you like, you can place
different applications on each of the home screens.
From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with
your finger in either direction. The main Home Screen
is located in the middle with a Home screen on each
side.
Understanding Your Phone
30
Navigating Through the Application Menus
Your phone initially has one Application Menu available. As
you add apps, additional screens will be automatically
created. Follow these steps to navigate through the
Application Menus:
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The first application
menu will be displayed.
2. If you have additional application menus, sweep the
screen left or right to access them.
3. Tap one of the application icons.
Note: As you add applications, the number of Application
menus that you have available will increase.
Navigating Using Sub-Menus
Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen
or have selected a feature or application such as Phone,
Contacts, Messages, or Internet.
To access a sub-menu:
.
1. Press
A sub-menu will appear at the bottom of the phone
screen.
31
2. Tap an option.
Note: Not all screens will have sub-menus available.
Accessing Recently-Used Apps
1. Press and hold
from any screen to open the
recently-used applications window.
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.
– or –
Tap
to go to the Task manager.
– or –
Tap
to go to Google Search.
– or –
Tap
to delete the record of all recently used
applications.
Using the Multi Window
This feature allows you to run multiple applications on the
current screen at the same time.
Note: Only applications found within the Multi window panel
can be active atop another current application on the
screen.
When launching applications that contain multimedia
files (music/video), audio from both files will be played
simultaneously.
Activating and Deactivating Multi window
There are two different ways you can activate and deactivate
the Multi window feature:
To activate Multi window via the Notification screen:
1. In a single motion, touch the Status bar to reveal the
Notifications tab, and then drag it to the bottom of the
screen to open the Notifications screen.
2. Swipe the row of icons to the left until the
Multi window icon is displayed.
4. Tap Home
to return to the Home screen.
5. Tap the tab to open the application panel showing
all the available Multi window apps.
Note: Once you have turned the Multi window option on in
step 3, you only need to press and hold the Back key
(
) to re-activate the Multi window feature.
To activate Multi window via the Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Multi window.
Device
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Multi
window field, to turn the feature on
.
3. Tap Home
to return to the Home screen.
4. Tap the tab to open the application panel showing
all the available Multi window apps.
To deactivate Multi window:
Press and hold the Back key (
). This action hides
the Multi window tab from view.
3. Tap the Multi window entry to activate the feature. The
icon turns green when active.
Understanding Your Phone
32
Repositioning the Multi Window
The Multi window contains two components: tab and apps
panel. The tab can be manually moved across the screen.
The apps panel (containing the scrollable apps) can be
relocated to lock onto the different sides of the screen
(top/bottom/left/right).
To move the tab:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for
approximately one-second, then slowly drag it to its
new location along the current screen edge.
Note: This is a quick way to get the tab out of the way if you
can’t get to a button or option behind it.
To relocate the Multi window apps panel:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
33
3. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for
approximately one-second to detach it from the
screen, then slowly drag it to its new location along any
other available screen edge.
Customizing the Multi Window apps
The applications found within the apps panel of the Multi
window can be organized by either being rearranged or
removed.
To rearrange the Multi window applications:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it
detaches from the panel, then carefully drag it to a new
location in the list of apps. Lift your finger or stylus off
the screen to let go of the app and drop it into its new
location.
More - access to additional functions
Create
To restore a Multi window application:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
Create - create a user-defined custom
Multi window (presets)
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
Edit - edit the available Multi window apps
(Edit) located at the bottom of
3. Tap
(More) ➔
the list) to reveal the staging area containing any
previously removed apps.
Edit
Help - access to Help information
Help
To edit a Multi window application:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
3. Tap More ➔ Edit (located at the bottom of the list) to
reveal a staging area (on the right) that can house any
removed applications from the Multi window panel.
4. Tap Done once you have completed the removal
process.
4. Locate the desired application.
5. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it
detaches from the staging area, then carefully drag it
to a new location in the current list of apps.
Using Multi Window to run multiple apps on the
same screen
Any of the apps found within the Multi window panel can be
run at the same time as a current on-screen app.
Once multiple apps are running on the same screen, you can
then choose to either swap their positions or maximize a
desired app.
Understanding Your Phone
34
Note: Only applications found within the Multi-window panel
can be active atop another current application on the
screen.
When launching applications that contain multimedia
files (music/video), audio from both files will be played
simultaneously.
App #1
Border
Bar
Switch
application
Switch
window
Close
application
Drag and
drop content
App #2
In this example we will be launching both the Internet and
Maps applications.
35
1. Launch an application such as Internet.
2. Activate the Multi window feature.
3. Tap the tab to display the apps panel.
4. Touch and hold the desired app, such as Maps, until it
detaches from the panel.
5. In a single motion, drag it over the current app and
drop the new Multi window app over either the top or
bottom area of the current on-screen app.
Note: Once two applications are running, the device displays a
split screen view containing both the initial app and the
new Multi window app. Each application is still
independent of the other.
To switch applications:
1. Tap the desired application area (top or bottom) that
you would like to switch out with another application.
2. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap
the Border button
to show the on-screen
functions.
3. Locate and tap
Switch application.
4. Scroll through the list of applications you already have
open and tap the one you wish.
The new application replaces the old one.
To switch windows: (swap the locations)
1. Tap the desired application area (top or bottom).
2. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap
the Border button
to show the on-screen
functions.
Switch window. The location of
3. Locate and tap
the current apps are switched.
To drag and drop content:
You can drag and drop text and images in selected
applications.
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap
one of the two on-screen apps to select it.
2. Tap the Border bar to show the on-screen icons.
3. Locate and tap
Drag and drop content.
4. Drag text or images from one app and drop them in the
other app.
5. If an application does not support Drag and drop, then
Not supported is displayed.
To close a selected application:
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap
one of the two on-screen apps to select it.
2. Tap the Border bar to show the on-screen icons.
3. Locate and tap
Close application. The current app
is closed and the remaining app is maximized.
To increase the size of a desired application window:
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen,
locate the Border bar indicating the edge of the app
window.
2. In a single motion, touch and hold the Border bar then
drag it to resize the desired window.
Creating a Customized Multi Window Preset
1. Arrange the Multi window view as desired (app
location, high of windows, etc.)
1. Once configured, tap
(More) ➔
(Create).
2. Use the on-screen keyboard to name the new preset of
paired windows.
Understanding Your Phone
36
3. Tap OK. The new preset then appears at the top of the
Multi window list of apps.
Customizing Your Home Screen
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:
• Creating Shortcuts
• Adding and Removing Widgets on the Home Screen
• Repositioning Widgets
• Creating Folders
• Changing the Wallpaper
• Adding and Deleting Home Screens
Creating Shortcuts
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen
Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a
feature, action, or launch an application.
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must
first be deleted from its current screen. Navigate to the
new screen, then add the shortcut.
Adding a shortcut from the Apps Menu
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Tap
to display your current applications.
4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired
application.
5. Touch and hold the application icon. This creates an
immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the
Apps tab.
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the
current page. Once complete, release the screen to
lock the new shortcut into its new position on the
current screen.
Adding a shortcut via the Add to Home screen
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen.
4. Tap Apps and widgets, Folder, or Page.
5. Press and hold a shortcut from the available list and
position it on the current screen.
37
Deleting a shortcut
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it
from its location on the current screen.
3. Drag the icon over the Remove icon
and release it.
As you place the shortcut into the Trash, both items
turn red.
Note: This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes
it from the current screen.
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the
shortcut. The Primary Shortcuts
exception of the Apps
that display on your Home screen by default, are Phone,
Contacts, Messaging, Internet, and Apps.
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to
replace, then drag it to an empty space on any Home
screen.
3. Scroll through the App menu to find the shortcut you
want to add as the new primary short cut.
4. Touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag it to the
empty space in the row of primary shortcuts.
The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home
screens.
Adding and Removing Widgets
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either
your Widgets tab or on the main or extended Home screens.
Unlike a shortcut, the Widget appears as an on-screen
application.
Adding a Widget
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
4. Tap Apps and Widgets.
5. Tap the Widgets tab at the top of the screen.
6. Press and hold an available Widget to position it on the
current screen, then release the Widget.
Understanding Your Phone
38
Removing a Widget
1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around
on the screen.
2. Drag the Widget over the Remove icon
it.
and release
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn
red.
Note: This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just
removes it from the current Home screen.
Moving Icons in the Apps Menu
1. Press
2. Tap
to activate the main Home screen.
to display your current applications.
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
4. Press
and tap View type.
7. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to
move.
8. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want.
To move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge
of the page until the page scrolls to the desired page.
9. Tap Save.
10. Press
to return to the Home screen.
Creating Application Folders
You can create application folders to hold similar applications
if you wish.
To create a folder follow these steps:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Tap
to display your current applications.
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
4. Press
and tap Edit.
5. Tap Customizable grid. A green circle will appear next
to the option.
5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like
to move to a folder.
6. Press
6. Drag the icon down to the Create folder
and tap Edit.
7. Enter a folder name and tap OK.
39
icon.
A folder is displayed in the original place of the
application icon with the application icon displayed on
top of it. You can now drag other Apps into the folder.
8. To view information on an App, drag the App icon up to
the App info
icon to view information on the
application.
9. Tap Save.
You can add a new page to your application menu by
following these steps:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
to display your current applications.
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
4. Press
You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home
screens by following these steps:
1. From any Home screen, touch and hold on an empty
area of the screen.
The Home screen window is displayed.
2. Tap Set wallpaper.
Adding a New Page to the Application Menu
2. Tap
Changing the Wallpaper
and tap Edit.
5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like
to move to a new page.
6. Drag the icon down to the Create page
icon.
3. Select the location where you would like to change the
wallpaper. Tap Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and
lock screens.
4. Tap one of the following options:
• Gallery: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken
with your camera.
• Live wallpapers: select an animated wallpaper. This option is
not available for the Lock screen option.
• Wallpapers: select from many still-life wallpapers.
5. Select a wallpaper and tap Set wallpaper, Done, or
Cancel.
7. Tap Save.
The app will appear on a new page.
Understanding Your Phone
40
Adding and Deleting Home Screens
You can add and delete Home screens. You can have up to
seven Home screens.
5. If there are items on the Home screen that you want to
delete, the Remove home screen page prompt is
displayed.
To add a new Home screen:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
6. Tap OK to delete the page and its contents, otherwise
tap Cancel.
2. Press
7. Press
and tap Edit page.
3. Tap the Home screen that contains
A new screen is added.
4. If desired, touch and hold the new screen and drag it to
a different location.
5. Press
to return to the main Home screen.
You can now add items to your new Home screen.
To delete a Home screen:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Press
and tap Edit page.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete.
4. Drag the Widget over the Remove icon
it. The page will turn red.
41
to return to the main Home screen.
Moving Home Screens
.
and release
You can arrange your Home screens in any order that you
want.
To move a Home screen, follow these steps:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Press
and tap Edit page.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move.
4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it.
In this example, the Dual clock app screen is moved to
the last position.
When you move a Home screen, the other Home
screens are be re-ordered automatically.
5. Press
to return to the main Home screen.
Notification Panel
The Notification Panel includes a pull-down list to show
information about processes that are running, recent
notifications, and alerts. To display the Status indicator:
On the Home screen, touch and hold the top of the
screen until the pull-down displays, then drag down
vertically.
Clearing Notifications
To clear all notifications from the Notification Panel:
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the top of the
screen until the pull-down displays, then drag down
vertically.
2. Tap the Clear button.
The notifications are cleared and the panel closes.
Accessing Additional Panel Functions
In addition to notifications, the Notification Panel also
provides quick and ready access to separate device
functions. These can be quickly activated or deactivated by
toggling them on or off. You can choose the functions that
will be displayed.
1. From the notification Panel, tap
additional options.
to display
The following functions (default) are located in the top
two rows and can either be activated (green) or
deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, GPS, Sound, Screen rotation,
Bluetooth, Reading mode, Blocking mode, Power
saving, Multi window, and Screen Mirroring.
2. Tap
then locate the Notifications panel area
located at the bottom of the Notifications panel screen.
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired function
from the bottom two rows and then drag it to the top
two rows. Additional functions are S Beam, NFC, Air
view, Air gesture, Hands-free mode, Smart stay, Smart
pause, Smart scroll, Sync, and Airplane mode.
4. Tap Brightness adjustment to create a checkmark if you
want to be able to adjust the screen brightness via the
Notification panel.
5. Tap
and then tap
functions.
to display only your primary
Understanding Your Phone
42
Memory Card
Your device lets you use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC
card to expand available memory space. This secure digital
card enables you to exchange images, music, and data
between SD-compatible devices. This section addresses the
features and options of your device’s SD functionality. The
device has a USB SD card mode.
Mounting the SD Card
To store additional photos, music, videos, and other
applications, you must mount (install) the SD card prior to
use. Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection
with your computer.
1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot. For
more information, refer to “Removing and Installing the
Memory Card” on page 7.
2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available
information on it.
43
Unmounting the SD card
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to
the SD card while removing it from the slot.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Storage.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the display and tap Unmount SD
card.
3. Tap OK.
For more information, refer to “Removing and Installing
the Memory Card” on page 7.
SD card Available Memory Status
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Storage.
2. The available memory for Device and SD card displays
under the Total space and Available space headings.
Erasing Files from the SD card
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,
refer to “Mounting the SD Card” on page 43.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Storage.
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap Format SD card.
3. At the Format SD card confirmation prompt, tap Format
SD card.
Warning! Performing the next step erases all data stored on
the SD card.
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that
can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or
sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when
entering text.
Keyboards and Input Methods
There are three text input methods available:
• Samsung keyboard (default): Samsung’s on-screen
QWERTY keypad that can be used in both portrait and
landscape orientation.
• Swype: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead
of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each
letter of a word.
• Google voice typing: allows you to enter text by speaking.
4. Tap Delete all to format or press
to cancel.
Entering Text
To change the input method, see “Keyboards and Input
Methods” on page 112.
This section describes how to select the desired text input
method when entering characters into your phone. This
section also describes the predictive text entry system that
reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering
text.
Understanding Your Phone
44
Entering Text Using the Samsung Keyboard
From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone
counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen
QWERTY keypad will display.
Shift
Key
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad
There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the
on-screen keys within the QWERTY keypad.
The available Text Input modes are: Sym and Abc.
Sym
Symbol/Numeric Mode: activates the number,
symbol, and emoticon keys.
ABC
ABC Mode: activates the default alphabet keys.
Can also be set to Abc or abc by using the shift
) key.
(
Delete
Key
Voice typing
and more options
Text Input Mode
Space Bar
New
Paragraph
Note: When in Abc mode, the Sym button will appear. When in
Sym mode, the Abc/ABC/abc button will appear.
Using ABC Mode
1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a
Landscape orientation.
2. When you tap the Enter message field, the following
screen displays:
3.
45
Tap the desired alphabetic characters.
4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the
first letter, the shift key (
) will change to
and following letters will be lowercase.
5. Tap
to input another upper-case letter or tap
twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will
change to
in ABC mode. All following letters
will be uppercase until you tap the shift key again.
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode
Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or
emoticons.
1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape
orientation.
2. Tap
Sym
at the bottom of the screen.
3. Tap the desired number, symbol, or emoticon
characters.
4. Tap the
5. Tap
ABC
1/2
button to access additional symbols.
to return to Abc mode.
Predictive Text
By using the Predictive Text option, you can have next-letter
prediction and regional error correction, which compensates
for pressing the wrong keys on the QWERTY keyboard.
Predictive text is turned on by default.
on the keyboard, then tap
1. Press and hold
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Predictive text field, to
, then tap
.
3. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing
a word. A list of word options is displayed above the
keyboard. Tap one of the words to replace the word
that has already been typed or scroll the line of words
to the left for more word choices.
4. Continue typing your message. Tap
to send the
message or press
for more options. For more
information, refer to “Creating and Sending Messages”
on page 139.
Note: You can also use Predictive Text mode in the portrait
orientation.
Understanding Your Phone
46
Entering Text Using Handwriting
You can enter text simply by using your finger to handwrite
letters on your screen.
on the keyboard, then tap
1. Press and hold
.
2. Use your finger tip to write out each character. You can
print or use cursive.
3. You can write out your entire message using the
Handwriting feature or tap
to switch back to
Samsung keyboard mode.
Samsung Keyboard Settings
For information on how you can configure your Samsung
keyboard settings, see “Samsung Keyboard settings” on
page 112.
Using the Google Voice Typing Feature
You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice
typing feature.
1. From the keypad, touch the top of the screen and drag
it down to display your notification panel.
2. Tap Select input method.
3. Tap Google voice typing.
47
4. At the Speak now prompt, speak clearly and distinctly
into the microphone.
5. If the red microphone turns gray, then the feature has
timed out and you should tap the microphone icon to
start again.
The text is displayed in the message as you are
speaking.
Note: The feature works best when you break your message
down into smaller segments.
Entering Text Using Swype
Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a
word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter,
lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error
correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the
next word. Swype also includes a tapping predictive text
system.
The following example shows how to enter the word “This”.
Put your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it
to the “h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”.
Swype Settings
For information on how you can configure your Swype
settings, see “Swype Keypad Settings” on page 114.
Swype Text Entry Tips
You may find the following Swype text entry tips helpful:
• Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such
as pp in apple).
Enabling and Configuring Swype
The Samsung keyboard is the default text input method, so
to use Swype, you must first change the default keyboard
setting.
To enable Swype:
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and
drag
down from the Notifications area then tap
Select input method.
• Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a
selection.
• Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter
contractions.
• Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a
misspelled word, then tap the delete key to erase one character.
Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.
2. Tap the Swype radio button. It will turn green.
The Swype keyboard is displayed.
Understanding Your Phone
48
Section 3: Call Functions
This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also
includes the features and functionality associated with
making or answering a call.
Displaying Your Phone Number
Tap
➔ Settings ➔ General General ➔ About
device ➔ Status. Your phone number is displayed in the
My phone number field.
Making a Call
1. From the Home screen, tap
and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.
2. Tap
to make the call.
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Voice Call
menu, the phone will automatically redial up to 10 times
when the person does not answer the call or is already
on the phone. For more information, refer to “Call
Settings” on page 60.
Making an International Call
1. From the Home screen, tap
, then touch and hold
0 + . The + character appears.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code,
area code, and phone number.
• If you make a mistake, tap
until the desired numbers
have been deleted.
3. Tap
to make the call.
Manual Pause Dialing
To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in
your Contacts list:
and use the on-screen
1. From the Home screen, tap
keypad to enter the phone number.
2. Press
to display the dialer sub-menu.
3. Tap Add 3-sec pause to add a three second pause, and
use the keypad to enter the additional numbers.
Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by
entering multiple three second pauses.
49
4. Select Add wait to add a wait. A wait will pause the
calling sequence until you enter a number or press a
key.
5. Tap
to make the call.
For more information, refer to “Adding Pauses to Contact
Numbers” on page 63.
Correcting an Entered Number
Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when
dialing.
After entering a number using the keypad:
• If you make a mistake, tap
to erase a single character.
• Press and hold
to erase the entire string of numbers.
Ending a Call
Tap the
key.
Dialing a Recent Number
All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the
Call log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address
Book, the associated name is also displayed.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap the Logs tab.
A list of recent calls is displayed.
3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the Details page, then
to make a call.
tap
Making Emergency Calls
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn
on the phone, the Insert SIM card to make calls message
displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install
the SIM card.
Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call
with the phone; normal cell phone service is not available.
Making an Emergency Call without a SIM card
1. Tap Emergency call from the on-screen display to make
an emergency call.
2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap
. Complete your call. During
this type of call, you will have access to the Speaker
mode, Keypad, and End Call features.
3. Tap
to exit this calling mode.
Making an Emergency Call with a SIM card
The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency
number a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal
calling operations, you should first exit this mode.
Call Functions
50
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Enter the emergency number (ex: 911) and then tap
.
3. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will
have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End
Call features.
• After completing your emergency call,
appears in the
Notification area until you exit the Emergency calling mode.
Note: This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly
than a normal calling mode.
Making a Call Using Speed Dial
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your
Contacts List for speed dialing.
to display
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
your Contacts List.
2. Press
to display the Contacts List sub-menu.
3. Tap Speed dial setting.
4. The Speed dial setting screen displays showing the
numbers 1 through 100. The number 1 is reserved for
Voicemail.
51
5. Tap an unused number and the Select contact screen
displays.
6. Select a contact to assign to the number. The selected
contact number will display in the speed dial number
box.
7. To remove a speed dial number or change the order,
press
to display the Speed dial setting sub-menu.
8. Tap Change order or Remove.
➔ Keypad
9. To make a call using Speed Dial, tap
and from the Dialer, touch and hold the speed dial
number.
Making a Call from the Address Book
You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the
SIM card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are
collectively called the Address Book.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 64.
Answering a Call
When a call is received the phone rings and displays the
caller’s phone number, or name if stored in the Address
Book.
1. At the incoming call screen:
• Touch and drag
in any direction to answer the call.
• Touch and drag
in any direction to reject the call and
send it to your voicemail.
• Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and
tap a predefined text message to send to the caller.
– I’m driving
– I’m at the movie theater
– I’m in class
– I’m in a meeting
– Sorry, I’m busy. Call back later.
Dialing Options
From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the
option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping
➔ Keypad. From the Dialer and the Contacts screen, the
following tabs are located at the top of your screen:
• Keypad: dials the current number entered using the on-screen
keypad.
• Logs: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls.
• Favorites: displays your contacts that you have marked as
Favorites.
• Contacts: takes you to your Address Book where you can select a
contact to call.
– or –
– Tap Create new message to compose a new message.
2. Tap
Note: You can answer a call while using the Address Book or
other menu feature. After ending the call, the phone
returns to the previously active function screen.
to end the call.
After you begin to enter numbers, the Add to contacts option
appears so you can save the Contact if needed.
Call Functions
52
Call Log
Calling Back a Missed Call
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,
received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the
details of the call.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap the Logs
tab.
To call back a missed call number:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Logs
.
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is
displayed.
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is
displayed.
2. Swipe the desired missed call to the right to call.
– or –
All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls
are identified by the following icons:
Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book
• Incoming Calls:
Swipe the desired missed call to the left to message.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Logs
.
A list of recent calls is displayed.
• Outgoing Calls:
2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book.
• Missed Calls:
3. The call detail page is displayed. Tap Create contact to
add the call to your Address Book.
• Rejected Calls:
• Auto Rejected Calls:
53
The Create contact screen is displayed.
– or –
If you want to replace the number for an existing
contact, tap Update existing.
Add as new
contact
Update an existing
contact
Call the number
Send a message
3. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and
use the on-screen keypad to type in a message.
4. When you are done with your message, tap
send.
to
For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending
Messages” on page 139.
Deleting a Call from the Call Log
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Logs.
A list of recent calls is displayed.
4. Enter information into the various fields using the
keypad.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Adding a New Contact” on page 62.
Sending a Message to a Recent Call
➔ Logs
3. Tap Delete.
4. At the Delete log prompt, tap Delete.
5. Tap Save to save when you are finished.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call
log.
The call is deleted from the Call log.
Adding a Call to the Reject List
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Swipe the entry you want to message to the left.
➔ Logs
.
A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject
List.
3. Tap Add to reject list.
Call Functions
54
Adjusting the Call Volume
4. At the Add to reject list prompt, tap OK.
Future calls from this number will be rejected and sent
to your voicemail.
Call Duration
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press
During a call, to adjust the earpiece volume, use the Volume
keys on the left side of the phone.
➔ Logs
.
➔ Call duration.
3. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data:
• Last call: shows the length of time for the last call.
• Dialed calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made.
• Received calls: shows the total length of time for all calls
received.
• All calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made and
received.
4. You may reset these times to zero by pressing
then tapping Reset.
Options During a Call
Your phone provides a number of control functions that you
can use during a call.
Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level
and press the Down volume key to decrease the
volume level.
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume
using these same keys.
In-Call Options
During an active call there are several functions available by
tapping a corresponding on-screen button.
• Hold: place the current active call on hold.
• Add call: displays the dialer so you can call another person.
• Keypad: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can
enter number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency).
• End call: terminates the call.
• Speaker: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or
through the earpiece.
– Tap Speaker to route the audio through the speaker. (You can
adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line
will appear under the Speaker button.
55
– Tap Speaker again to use the phone’s earpiece (see “Using
the Speakerphone During an Active Call” on page 58). The
green line will disappear when Speaker is not activated.
• Mute/Unmute turn the onboard microphone either on or off.
– Tap Mute during a call to mute the microphone. A green line
will appear under the Mute button.
– Tap Mute again to unmute the microphone. The green line will
disappear when Mute is not activated.
• Headset connects to a Bluetooth headset.
– Tap Headset during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A
green line will appear under the Headset button.
– Tap Headset again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The
green line will disappear when the Headset is not activated.
• Press
for more options:
– Contacts: allows you to go to your Contact list.
– Action Memo: allows you to write a note using the Action
Memo feature.
– Message: allows you to write a message during a call.
– One-handed operation on/off: allows you to enable or disable
the resize and reposition the keypad/dialer for either lefthanded (off) or right-handed operation (on).
Personalizing the Call Sound Setting
During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound of the
incoming call by selecting an audio equalizer setting for the
current call.
1. From the call screen, tap
.
2. Confirm the option is enabled
.
3. Select an available option. Choose from: Adapt Sound,
Soft sound, Clear sound, and Off.
Activating Noise Reduction
During a call it may be necessary to activate the noise
reduction feature. Activating this feature can improve the
quality of your conversation by reducing ambient noise.
Noise reduction in on by default.
1. Press
to turn Noise reduction off.
2. Press
to turn Noise reduction on.
Call Functions
56
Placing a Call on Hold
Switching Between Calls
You can place the current call on hold at any point during a
conversation. You can also make another call while you have
a call in progress if your network supports this service.
Hold . This action places
1. While on a call, tap Hold
the current caller on hold.
2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping Unhold
Unhold .
To make a new call while you have a call in progress
Hold .
1. Tap Hold
2. Tap Add call
to display the dialer.
3. Enter the new number and tap
.
Once connected, the active call will appear in a large
box at the top of your screen and the call on hold will
appear in a smaller box in the middle of your screen.
When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may
switch between the two calls, changing the one on hold to
active and placing the other on hold.
1. Tap Swap.
The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the
previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so
that you can continue conversing with that person. The
active call will appear in a green box.
2. Tap
to end the currently active call.
To end a specific call
1. Tap Swap until the call you want to end appears in a
green box.
2. Tap
to end the specific call.
3. Tap
to end the remaining call.
To answer a call while you have a call in progress
1. Tap
and slide to the right to answer another call.
2. Tap Putting "Name/Number" on hold to put the first call
on hold.
– or –
57
Tap Ending call with "Name/Number" to end the first
call.
3. To switch between the two calls, tap Swap.
• Swap: Places the current call on hold and then activates the
previous call. The active call will appear in a green box. Tap
Swap again to switch back.
To end a call on hold
1. Tap
to disconnect the active call.
2. The call on hold will now become the active call. Tap
to end the call.
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)
The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a
series of incoming calls and place them on hold. If this
service is supported by the network, all calls can be joined
together. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting
tone.
This feature joins all of the calls you have established with
your phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.
1. Tap
and slide to the right to answer the call.
2. Tap
and slide to the right to answer the next call.
3. Tap Putting "Name/Number" on hold to put the first call
on hold.
4. Join the first two callers into a single multi-party call by
tapping Merge
.
Merge
5. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap Hold
Hold .
To rejoin the conference call tap Unhold
6. Tap
Unhold
.
to end the call.
Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call
While in an active call, it is possible to enable the
speakerphone feature.
.
1. Tap Speaker
Speaker
Note: The Merge option combines all of the calls you have
established with your phone (both active and on hold).
Swap places the current call on hold and then activates
the previous call.
The Speaker button now appears as
speakerphone is activated.
Speaker
and the
2. Use the Volume keys (located on the left side of your
phone) to adjust the volume.
3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap Speaker
Call Functions
Speaker
.
58
The Headset button now appears as
Bluetooth headset is activated.
Important! For more information, see “Responsible Listening”
on page 222.
Headset
and the
3. Tap Headset
to deactivate the Bluetooth headset
and reactivate the phone speaker.
Headset
Switching off the Microphone (Mute)
You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so
that the other person cannot hear you.
Example: You wish to say something to person in the room,
but do not want the person on the phone to hear
you.
To mute your phone during a call
1. Tap Mute
.
Mute
The Mute button now appears as
activated.
Mute
and Mute is
2. Tap Mute
to deactivate the Mute function and
reactivate the microphone.
Mute
Bluetooth headset
1. Tap Headset
Headset
.
2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When
found, connect to the headset.
59
Searching for a Number in Address Book
1. During the active call, press
then tap Contacts.
2. Tap the Address Book entry.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 64.
Call Waiting
The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming
call while you have a call in progress, if this service is
supported by the network, and you must first activate the
Call Waiting feature:
From the Home screen, tap
➔
➔ Additional settings ➔Call waiting.
➔ Call settings
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting
tone.
Call Settings
To access the Call settings menu:
From the Home screen, tap
settings.
– or –
➔
From the Home screen, tap
Device ➔ Call.
➔ Settings ➔
➔ Call
Device
For detailed information on all of the call settings, see “Call
Settings” on page 105.
Call Functions
60
Section 4: Contacts and Your Address Book
This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by
storing their name and number in your Address Book.
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group.
AT&T Address Book Activation
When you access the AT&T Address Book, the network
backup service, contacts are automatically synchronized
between your phone and online address book. The changes
you make are automatically saved and if you ever upgrade,
damage, or lose your phone, you can easily restore your
contacts onto your new phone.
To activate the AT&T Address Book:
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
Your Address Book is displayed.
2. If you have not synchronized your phone with your
online AT&T Address Book recently, the AT&T Address
Book screen is displayed. Tap Yes if you want to
synchronize your Address Book.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Your AT&T Address Book is Ready to Use. You can now make
a call or send a message through your Address Book.
61
You can also manage your Address Book on the web
at http://www.att.com/addressbook.
Synchronizing your AT&T Address Book
If you ever upgrade, damage, or lose your phone, you can
easily restore your contacts onto your new phone by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
2. Press
➔ Settings ➔ AT&T Address Book.
3. At the AT&T Address Book screen, tap Yes to
synchronize your phone with your online Address Book.
4. If there are existing contacts on your phone, you will be
prompted if you would like to remove them first. Tap
Yes or No.
Note: You must first copy any contacts that exist on your SIM
card to your phone. For more information, refer to
“Copying Contacts to the Phone” on page 72.
Your phone is synchronized.
5. At the Your AT&T Address Book is Ready for Use screen,
tap OK.
Your Contact list is displayed.
Adding a New Contact
Use the following procedure to add a new contact to your
Address Book.
Saving a Number from the Home screen
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
➔
.
2. At the Save contact to prompt, tap on Device or Account
name.
3. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new
entry by choosing one of three options:
• Image: retrieve a previously stored image from your Gallery or
from your My files folder and assign it to this entry. Tap an
image to assign the image to the contact, then tap Done.
• Pictures by people: retrieve a previously shared image from
your Gallery.
• Take picture: use the camera to take a new picture and assign
it to this entry, then tap Done.
• S Note: use an image from one of your S Notes.
• Remove: although not an option with a new entry, deletes any
previously assigned image on an existing contact.
4. Tap the Name field and use the on-screen keypad to
enter the full name. For more information, refer to
“Entering Text” on page 44.
– or –
Tap
next to the Name field to display additional
name fields.
5. Tap the Phone number field.
The numerical keypad is displayed.
The Mobile button Mobile initially displays next to the
Phone number field. If you want to add a phone number
that is not a mobile number, tap the Mobile button and
select another phone number type.
6. Enter the phone number.
Tap
to add another Phone number field or tap
to delete a field.
7. Tap the Email address field.
The keyboard is displayed.
Contacts and Your Address Book
62
The Home button Home initially displays next to the
Email field. If you want to add an Email address that is
not a Home email address, tap the Home button and
select another Email address type.
8. Enter the Email address.
Tap
to add another Email address field or tap
to delete a field.
9. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to
your new contact:
• Groups: assign the contact to Not assigned, Favorites, ICE emergency contacts, Co-workers, Family, or Friends.
• Ringtone: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will
sound when messages are received from this contact.
• Message alert: allows you to set the ringtone for your
message alerts.
• Vibration pattern: allows you to set the specific type of
vibration.
• Add another field: tap this button to add additional fields.
10. Tap Save to save the new contact.
63
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers
When you call automated systems, you are often required to
enter a password or account number. Instead of manually
entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers
in your Contacts along with special characters called pauses
and waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two
seconds and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you
enter a number or press a key.
To add a pause or a wait to an existing Contact:
, and then tap
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
the name or number to open the Contact.
2. Tap
to edit.
3. Tap the phone number field.
4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait
needs to be added.
5. Tap
.
6. Tap Pause(,) to add a two-second pause or tap Wait(;)
to add a wait, and use the keypad to enter the
additional numbers. A pause will be displayed as a
comma (,) and a wait will be displayed as a semi-colon
(;).
7. Tap Save to save your changes, or tap Cancel to
discard.
Editing an Existing Contact
When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and
change or delete the information, or you can add additional
fields to the contact’s list of information.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
2. Tap the Contact that you want to edit.
3. Tap
to edit.
4. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete
information.
5. Tap Save to save the edited information.
Using Contacts
Dialing or Messaging from Address Book
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,
you can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM
card location number or by using the Search field to locate
the entry.
From the Address book, you can also send messages.
Finding an Address Book Entry
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding
names onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory.
The two locations are physically separate but are used as a
single entity, called the Address Book.
Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum
number of phone numbers the SIM card can store and how
they are stored may differ.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a
letter on the right side of the display to quickly jump to
the contacts beginning with that letter.
3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message.
4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the
message icon to send a message.
For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending
Messages” on page 139.
Tip: From the Contact list, sweep right over a listing to make a
call. Sweep left over a listing to send a message.
Contacts and Your Address Book
64
Linking Contacts
Linking Contact Information
Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social
networking logins, and other similar account information. For
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a
corporate email account login because they are maintained
separately and for different groups of people.
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as
Facebook, Twitter, Corporate email, and Google. When you
synchronize your phone with these accounts, each account
creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a
regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also
has a Facebook account under her maiden and married
name, as well as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge
these accounts into your Contacts list you can link all of her
entries and view the information in one record.
The next time you synchronize your phone with your
accounts, any updates that contacts make to email account
names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your
contacts list.
65
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see
“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 67.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to
another entry). Typically this is the same contact with a
different name or account information.
3. Press
➔ Link contact.
The contact list is displayed.
Note: Only contacts stored on your device can be linked.
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to
link). The second contact is now linked with the first
and the account information is merged into one screen.
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but
displays in one record for easier viewing when you link
the contacts.
5. Tap area under the Connection bar to view the contact
information you linked. The contacts and information
displays with an icon next to the contact name to
indicate what type of account information is contained
in the entry.
Unlinking a Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you
want to unlink an entry). Note: typically this is the same
contact with a different name or account information.
3. Tap the link icon
under the Connection bar.
4. Tap the minus sign
want to unlink.
next to entry in which you
5. At the Separate contact prompt, tap OK.
The contact is now separated and no longer displays in
the merged record screen.
Marking a Contact as Default
When you use messaging type applications, the application
needs to know which information is primary (default) in a
contact entry list. For example, you may have three different
contact records for John Smith, so the application will be
looking for the “default” number or entry.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
2. Tap a Contact name.
3. Press
➔ Mark as default. The Mark as default
screen displays radio buttons next to the contact
names or phone numbers of all the linked contacts.
The radio button next to the default contact will be
green.
4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next
to another entry that you want to be the default. The
radio button will turn green, then tap Done.
Contacts and Your Address Book
66
Synchronizing Accounts
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications
to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if
you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,
indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts
list.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
2. Press
then tap Accounts.
If you have previously added any accounts, the Sync
settings prompt is displayed with your current accounts
listed.
3. Tap an account that you would like to synchronize.
Note: You can also synchronize your accounts using the
Settings menu. For more information, refer to
“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 125.
Address Book Options
You can access Address Book options while at the main
Address Book page or while in the details page for a specific
entry.
Options in Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
then press
2. The following options are displayed:
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.
4. At the Sync settings screen, tap the options that you
would like to synchronize for that account.
• Business cards: allows you to take pictures of business cards
and have the information added to your contact list.
5. Tap Sync now to synchronize the account.
• SIM Management: allows you to copy contacts from your
phone to your SIM card or from your SIM card to your phone.
You can also delete contacts from your SIM.
The account is synchronized.
6. Press
to return to the Contacts list.
• Import/Export: allows you to move contacts to or from your
memory card or USB storage.
67
• Share namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s
information via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or
Wi-Fi Direct.
• Accounts: allows you to add and manage your Samsung,
ChatON, Google, and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts.
Tap Add account and then follow the on-screen instructions.
• Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing. For
more information, refer to “Making a Call Using Speed
Dial” on page 51.
• Send message/email: allows you to send a text or message.
• Contacts to display: You can choose to display all of your
contacts or only display contacts on your Device, SIM, or
contacts stored to other accounts. You can also tap Customized
list to change other options on how your contacts are displayed.
• Settings: allows you to choose set the following options:
– Only contacts with phones: allows you to only display
contacts that have phone numbers.
– List by: allows you to sort by First name or Last name.
– Display contacts by: allows you to sort by First name or Last
name first.
– Service numbers: allows you to display or edit your service
numbers.
– Contact sharing settings: allows you to send all or individual
contacts via Bluetooth in the form of namecards.
– AT&T Address Book: allows you to access the AT&T Address
Book so you can sync your contacts.
• Help: provides additional information.
Options at Selected Contact Screen
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
2. Tap a contact and at the contact’s display screen, press
.
3. The following options are displayed:
• History: allows you to view the phone and message history for
the contact.
• Edit: allows you to change the contact’s information. For more
information, refer to “Editing an Existing Contact” on
page 64.
• Delete: allows you to delete the contact from your Address
Book.
• Link contact: allows you to link contacts with other contacts
(only displays when contact is saved to SIM).
Contacts and Your Address Book
68
• Separate contact: allows you to separate contacts that have
been linked. This option only appears if the contact has been
linked.
• Mark as default: when you have multiple contacts linked
together, you can mark one of them as default (only displays
when contact is saved to the phone). For more information,
refer to “Marking a Contact as Default” on page 66.
• Assign speed dial: allows you to assign this contact to your
speed dial list. For more information, refer to “Making a Call
Using Speed Dial” on page 51.
• Share namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s
information via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or
Wi-Fi Direct.
Groups
Adding a Contact to a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
in the Groups section. If the contact has not
3. Tap
been previously added to a group, Not assigned is
shown.
4. Tap the group that you would like to add the contact to.
You may select as many groups as you like.
5. Tap Save.
The contact is added to the group.
Removing a Contact From a Group
• Add to/Remove from reject list: allows you to add or remove
the contact from your reject list. If they call while being on the
reject list, the call will be sent directly to voice mail.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
Groups
.
• Add shortcut to home: allows you to place a shortcut for this
contact on your Home screen.
3. Press
➔
Groups
2. Tap a group entry.
➔ Remove member.
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this
group. A green checkmark will appear next to their
name.
5. Tap Done.
69
.
2. Tap a contact that you would like to add to a group.
The contacts are now removed from the group.
Creating a New Group
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
➔
➔ Create.
➔ Groups
Groups
2. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a new group name. For more
information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 44.
3. Tap Group ringtone to choose a ringtone for assignment
to this new group. Tap a ringtone to hear how it
sounds, then tap OK.
– or –
Tap Add to select a ringtone from your music files.
6. Tap Add member to add contacts to the new group.
7. Tap each contact you want to add to create a
checkmark. You can also tap Select all.
8. Tap Done.
9. Tap Save to save the new Group category.
Editing a Caller Group
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as
part of the selected group.
➔ Groups
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
Groups
2. Tap a group entry.
3. Press
➔ Edit group.
4. Tap Message alert to choose an alert tone for
assignment to this new group, then tap OK.
4. Make modifications to the Group name, Group ringtone,
Message alert, or Vibration pattern fields.
5. Tap Vibration pattern to choose a vibration audio file for
assignment to this new group, then tap OK.
– or –
5. Tap Add member to add more contacts to this group.
6. Tap Save to save the edited Group category.
Tap Create and follow the on-screen instructions to
create your own vibration pattern.
Contacts and Your Address Book
70
Address Book Favorites
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,
you can add them to your Favorites list.
To view your Favorites list:
➔ Favorites
From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
Favorites
Adding Favorites to your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
2. Within the Contacts list, tap a contact that you want to
add to your Favorites list.
3. Tap the white start in the top right corner of the screen.
4. The star will turn gold and the contact is added to your
Favorites list. A gold star will also appear next to the
contact in the Address Book.
Removing Favorites from your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
2. Within the Contacts list, tap a contact that you want to
remove from your Favorites list.
3. Tap the gold start in the top right corner of the screen.
71
4. The star will turn white and the contact is removed
from your Favorites list. A gold star will no longer
appear next to the contact in the Address Book.
Managing Address Book Contacts
You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the
Phone and SIM contacts on your phone.
Copying Contacts to the SIM Card
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card,
only the name, phone number, and email address are
available as fields. Also, if you move the SIM card to
another phone that does not support additional fields on
the SIM card, this additional information may not be
available.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
SIM Management.
➔
➔
2. Tap Copy Contacts to SIM.
The phone then displays a list of your current phone
contacts.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card.
• Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the
SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
4. Tap Done to copy.
The selected numbers are copied.
Deleting Contacts from the SIM card
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
SIM Management.
5. At the Copy to SIM display, tap OK.
The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.
➔
➔
➔
2. Tap Delete Contacts from SIM.
Copying Contacts to the Phone
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
SIM Management.
5. Tap Done to copy.
➔
2. Tap Copy Contacts from SIM.
3. At the Create contact under account prompt, tap on
Device or an account name that you would like to copy
the contact to.
The phone then displays a list of your current contacts
stored on your SIM card.
4. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have copied to your phone.
• Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to
your phone or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
The phone then displays a list of your current SIM
contacts.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have deleted from the SIM
card.
• Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the
SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
4. Tap Delete.
5. At the Delete Contacts from SIM prompt, tap OK.
The selected numbers are deleted from the SIM card.
Contacts and Your Address Book
72
Deleting Address Book Entries from the Phone
You can delete Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s
memory.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to delete.
3. Tap Delete on the displayed list.
4. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete the contact or
Cancel to exit.
Using the Service Dialing Numbers
You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN)
assigned by your service provider. These numbers may
include emergency numbers, customer service numbers, and
directory inquiries.
➔
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
Settings.
2. Tap Service numbers.
3. Scroll through the available numbers (if available).
4. Tap a number and the call is made.
73
Note: This menu is available only when your SIM card
supports Service Dialing Numbers.
Section 5: Pictures and Videos
This section explains features related to the use of the
camera and camcorder on your phone. You can take
photographs and shoot video by using the built-in camera
functionality. Your 13 megapixel camera produces photos in
JPEG format.
Important! Do not take photos of people without their
permission.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are
not allowed.
Do not take photos in places where you may
interfere with another person’s privacy.
Using the Camera
Taking Photos
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then
pressing the camera key.
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright
conditions, shadows may appear on the photo.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera
activate the camera mode.
to
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.
3. Before you take a picture, use the Up and Down Volume
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up
to x4 (400 percent).
– or –
Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to
zoom in.
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap
on-screen icons to access various camera options and
settings.
5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to the
area you touch.
6. Press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter sounds.
(The picture is automatically stored within your
designated storage location. If no microSD is installed,
all pictures are stored on the Phone.)
Pictures and Videos
74
Taking Dual Camera Photos
Front Dual Camera Quick Settings
Facing
Camera
Camera Mode
Record
Video
With the Dual Camera feature, you can take a picture with
both the front and rear cameras at the same time.
To take a Dual Camera picture:
1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Dual Camera icon
located at the top left side of the screen.
Take
Picture
The camera viewfinder displays an image from the
front-facing camera within a postage stamp picture
frame on top of the main image displayed from the
rear-facing camera.
Change
Mode
Image
Viewer
(Gallery)
Viewfinder
Effects
7. While viewing a picture, after you have taken it, pinch
the screen outwards to zoom in or pinch the screen
inwards to zoom out.
2. Press the Camera key (
You can magnify the picture up to x4.
8. Press
) to take the picture.
To resize the front camera image:
to return to the viewfinder.
Touch and hold the postage stamp picture frame until
the resize handles appear, then drag a corner to
enlarge the image.
To reposition the front camera image
75
Touch and hold the postage stamp picture frame to
detach it and then move it to a desired location.
Camera Modes
There are many different camera modes that you can use to
help optimize your photos depending on the conditions and
your experience.
1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Mode button MODE
to change the mode to one of the following:
– Auto: Automatically adjusts your camera to optimize color and
brightness. This is the default setting
– Beauty face: Use this to take photos with lightened faces for
gentler images.
– Best photo: Use this to take multiple photos in a short time,
and then choose the best photos among them. Press the
Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens, tap
and hold thumbnails of photos to save, and then tap Done.
– Best face: Use this to take multiple group shots at the same
time and combine them to create the best possible image. Press
the Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens,
tap the yellow frame on each face, and choose the best
individual face for the subject. After choosing a pose for each
individual, tap Done to merge the images into a single photo,
and tap Save.
– Sound & shot: Use this mode to enrich pictures by adding
background sounds for a few seconds. The background sound
is recorded for up to 9 seconds after taking the photo.
– Drama: Use this to take a series of photos of a moving object
and then merge them together into one image.
– Animated photo: Use this to create a picture in which a few
selected static objects move by animating objects detected by
the device.
– Golf: Use this feature to take pictures of a gold swing and then
play the pictures back (forwards or backwards).
– Rich tone (HDR): Use this to take photos with richer colors and
contrasts.
– Eraser: Saves the best of 5 taken pictures and removes any
passers by.
– Panorama: Use this to take wide panoramic photos. Press the
Shutter button to take a photo, and then move the camera in
any direction. When the blue frame aligns with the preview
screen, the camera automatically takes another shot in the
panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, press the Shutter button
again.
Pictures and Videos
76
– Surround shot: Use this to take a 360-degree pictures that are
then used to create a spherical panorama.
– Sports: Use this to take fast action photos.
Quick Settings
Tap
at the top of the display to quickly change
Camera settings. Not all of the following options are available
in both still camera and video camera modes. The available
options vary by mode.
Configure Camera settings.
Activate or deactivate the flash.
Activate/deactivate night detection.
Activate or deactivate the voice control to take photos.
Select a resolution for videos.
Camera and Camcorder Settings
This section describes the different settings that you can
configure on your camera. Not all of the following options are
available in both still camera and video camera modes. The
available options vary by mode.
1. From the viewfinder, tap
(Quick Settings) ➔
(Camera Settings).
2. The follow settings are located under the Camera,
Camcorder, and General tabs. The settings that are
displayed will depend on what camera mode you are
in.
Camera:
• Photo size: Select a resolution for photos. Use higher
resolution for higher quality. Higher resolution photos take up
more memory.
Activate or deactivate the sharing options.
• Burst shot: allows several photographs to be captured in quick
succession by touching and holding the Camera button.
Hide Quick settings.
• Tap to take pics: allows you to tap the screen to also take a
new picture (vs using the Camera button).
• Face detection: allows you to adjust the camera focus based
on face detection technology.
77
• Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or
meters the light source: Center-weighted, Matrix, or Spot.
• ISO: determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital
camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400, or 800. Use a
lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light, a
higher ISO number to take photos with less light, or Auto to let
the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.
• Smart stabilization: compensates for camera movement.
• Save as: allows you to assign rich tone usage to an image.
Camcorder:
• Video size: Select a resolution for videos. Use higher resolution
for higher quality. Higher resolution videos take up more
memory.
• Video stabilization: Activate or deactivate Optical Image
Stabilization.
• Audio zoom: when active, allows you to focus your
microphone on a zoomed area during video recording.
Settings:
• Location tag: attach a GPS location tag to the photo. To
improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the
signal may be obstructed, such as between buildings or in lowlying areas, or in poor weather conditions. Your location may
appear on your photos when you upload them to the Internet.
To avoid this, deactivate the Location tag setting.
• Review: set this option if you want to view each picture after
you take it. Select a time value.
• Volume key: assigns a function to the volume key. Choose
from The zoom key, The camera key, or The record key.
• Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. You can set the timer to
Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.
• White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so
images have a true-to-life color range. The settings are
designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are
similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in
professional cameras.
• Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level by
moving the slider.
Pictures and Videos
78
• Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition
when selecting subjects.
• Flash: activate or deactivate the flash.
• Voice control: activates/deactivates voice control feature that
allows you to verbally take a photo.
• Contextual filename: allows you to have your location added
as part of the filename. You must first activate GPS tag
described above.
• Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you to take
and save a mirror-image video when using self-recording
mode.
• Storage: Select the memory location for storage.
• Shutter sound: Turn the shutter sound on or off.
Editing a Photo
You can edit your photos using the built-in Photo editor
application on your device. The photo editor application
provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on
your phone. Along with basic image tuning like brightness,
contrast, and color it also provides a wide variety of effects
used for editing the picture.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Gallery
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
3. With the image displayed, press
the Photo editor.
➔ Edit to launch
Note: To select the picture area, touch and hold the current
picture.
• Reset: Reset the camera settings.
Viewing your Pictures
After you take a photo, you can access various options from
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery. For
more information, refer to “Gallery” on page 82.
4. Select an image area by touching and holding the
image and then selecting an available option:
• Selection mode: provides several on-screen selection options
such as: Select area, Inverse selection, Selection size, and
Selection mode (Magnetic, Lasso, Brush, Round, and Square).
• Select all: select the entire area of the current image.
79
• Clipboard: copies the currently selected area to your device’s
clipboard.
5. Use the following editor controls to edit your picture:
Previous: move to previous photo project.
Effects: allows you to add various effects to your
photo.
Portrait: allows you to apply various face
correction effects such as: Red-eye fix, Airbrush
face, Face brightness, Out-of-focus, or Spot
healing.
Next: move to next photo project.
Sticker: allows you to place various pre-created
on-screen stickers atop your current image.
Cancel: exits the current photo editing session.
Drawing: allows you to add draw directly on your
current picture by using either a brush/pen or
eraser.
Save: stores the currently edited photo.
Rotate: allows you to rotate a photo in all 4
directions. You can also mirror image a photo.
Crop: allows you to crop (cut-out) an area of a
photo.
Color: allows you to Auto adjust color, Brightness,
Contrast, Saturation, Adjust RGB, Temperature,
Exposure, and Hue of a photo.
Frame: places a pre-created border style atop
your current image.
6. Press
to access the following options:
• Save as: allows you to rename your current image and save it
to your gallery.
• Select image: allows you to select a new image for editing.
• Take picture: allows you to activate the camera and take a
new image for editing.
Pictures and Videos
80
• Share via: allows you to share your saved photo via AT&T
Locker, Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google+,
Group Play, Hangouts, Messaging, PEN.UP, Picasa, S Note,
Scrapbook, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Set as: assigns the currently saved image as either a: Contact
photo, Home and lock screens, Home screen, or Lock screen.
Using the Camcorder
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send
videos.
2. Using the camera’s main display screen as a
viewfinder, adjust the image by aiming the camcorder
at the subject.
3. Before you take a video, use the Volume control
buttons to zoom in or out. You can magnify the video up
to x4 (400 percent).
4. Tap the Video key (
) to begin shooting video. The
red light will blink while recording.
5. You can tap the screen to move the focus to the area
you touch.
Note: The camera may not be able to properly record videos to
a memory card with a slow transfer speed.
6. To capture an image from the video while recording,
tap
. This feature is not available while the
anti-shake feature is activated.
Shooting Video
7. Tap the Pause key (
) to stop the recording and
save the video file to your Camera folder.
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright
conditions, it is recommended that you provide your
subject with sufficient light by having the light source
behind you.
8. Tap the Stop key ( ) to stop the recording and save
the video file to your Camera folder.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera
activate the camera mode.
81
to
9. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer,
then tap
to play your video.
10. Press
to return to the viewer.
Viewing your Videos
After you take a video, you can access various options from
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery and
the Video player. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on
page 82. Also, see “Video” on page 199.
Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and
share as a picture message.
.
1. Tap
➔ Gallery
All of the Albums that hold your pictures and videos will
be displayed with folder name and number of files.
2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents will be
displayed.
Note: If your device displays that the memory is full when you
access Gallery, delete some of the files by using My Files
or other file management applications and try again. For
more information, refer to “My Files” on page 184.
Viewing Pictures
1. Within an album, tap a thumbnail to view a single
picture.
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to
display them.
2. The following options are available at the top of the
screen:
• Change player
: allows you to change the device the
picture is displayed on if you are using AllShare/Samsung Link.
• Share via
: allows you to share the picture via ChatON,
Group Play, AT&T Locker, Bluetooth, Email, Flipboard, Gmail,
Google+, Hangouts, Messaging, PEN.UP, Picasa, S Note,
Scrapbook, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Delete
• Camera
3. Press
: allows you to delete the picture.
: activates the camera.
for additional options.
Pictures and Videos
82
Viewing Videos
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide
the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on
.
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to
display them.
5. On the source device (containing the desired image or
.
video), tap
➔ Gallery
1. Tap a video to select it.
2. Tap
3. Press
to play the video.
for additional options.
For video player controls, see “Video” on page 199.
Using S Beam to Share Pictures
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam
large files directly to another compatible device that is in
direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD
pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and
videos from your gallery, music files from your Music, and
more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings.
2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide
the NFC slider to the right to turn it on
.
3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on.
83
6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the
preview window.
Important! Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying
the Lock screen. They must both be active and
unlocked. It is recommended that the target device
be on the Home screen.
7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back
to begin.
Note: If the Touch to beam screen does not appear on the
source device:
- Pull them apart
- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on
the source device (providing the file)
- Place them together again
8. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer.
9. When prompted, separate the two devices. After a few
seconds (depending on file size) the recipient with then
see the transferred file displayed on their screen.
To share multiple pictures via S Beam:
1. On the source device (containing the desired image or
video), tap
➔ Gallery
.
2. Locate the selected folder.
3. Touch and hold the first image and place a checkmark
on it and all desired images.
4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back
to begin.
5. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer.
6. When prompted, separate the two devices.
7. The picture(s) is transferred to the other device.
Pictures and Videos
84
Section 6: Changing Your Settings
This section explains the settings used for customizing your
device.
Device
Accessing Settings
1. From any Home screen, tap
– or –
From any Home screen, press
➔ Settings
.
➔ Settings.
Settings Tabs
The Settings are divided into 4 main groups. When the
Settings screen displays, the following 4 tabs are located at
the top of the screen:
Connections
85
Connections:
This tab allows you to see all of settings related to
the connection of your device to external sources.
Options include: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Tethering and
portable hotspot, Airplane mode, Data usage,
Location services, More networks (Mobile networks
and VPN), NFC, S Beam, Nearby devices, and Screen
Mirroring.
Controls
Device:
This tab provides access to display configuration
and features. Options include: Sound, Display, Multi
window, LED indicator, Lock screen, Wallpaper,
Font, Notification panel, Easy mode, Accessibility,
Call, and Blocking mode.
Controls:
This tab provides access to Voice and input methods
and Motion control. Options include: Language and
input, Voice control, Hands-free mode, S Pen, Onehanded operation, Air gesture, Air view, Air
command, Motions, Palm motion, Smart screen,
and Increase touch sensitivity.
General
General:
This tab provides access to the General set of device
settings not listed under the other three tabs. These
include Accounts, Backup and reset, Date and time,
Accessory, Browser Bar, Application manager,
Battery, Power saving mode, Storage, Security, and
About device.
Note: The settings for your device are described below in the
order that they appear within the Settings menu. Options
under the Connections tab are listed first, followed by
Device, Controls, and General settings.
Activating Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
.
3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct
button.
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Direct” on page
156.
Wi-Fi Settings
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For information on
how to use Wi-Fi, see “Wi-Fi” on page 153.
Activating Wi-Fi
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
3. Tap Scan to scan for available Wi-Fi networks. For more
information, refer to “Connect to a Wi-Fi Network” on
page 153.
➔ Settings ➔
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
.
Advanced Wi-Fi Settings
The advanced Wi-Fi settings allow you to set up and manage
wireless access points.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
Connections
2. Press
➔ Advanced.
The following options are available:
Changing Your Settings
86
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.
• Passpoint: allows you to connect to passpoint-enabled Wi-Fi
Access Points automatically. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on
.
• Sort by: allows you to sort by alphabet or RSSI.
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to
disconnect from Wi-Fi.
• Always allow scanning: allows the Google location service
and other apps to scan for networks, even when Wi-Fi is turned
off.
• Auto network switch: allows the device to automatically
switch between a Wi-Fi network or a cellular network.
• Auto connect: allows you to be automatically connected to an
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.
• Install certificates: allows you to install security certificates
that you have on a MicroSD card.
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.
Bluetooth settings
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a
device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices
can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices
with which to pair.
Activating Bluetooth
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections.
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON
.
The Bluetooth icon
is displayed on the status bar.
Additional Bluetooth Settings
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Bluetooth.
Connections
2. Tap Scan to scan for nearby discoverable devices. After
searching, tap a device to pair with it. For more
information, refer to “Pairing Bluetooth Devices” on
page 159.
3. Press
87
➔ Settings ➔
and select a Bluetooth setting to configure:
• Visibility timeout: Use this setting to control when to
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5
minutes, 1 hour, or Never time out.
• Received files: Shows the list of files received by using
Bluetooth.
• Help: Displays additional Bluetooth information.
4. Tap the checkbox next to SAMSUNG-SM-N900A to
remove the checkmark if you do not want your phone
visible to other Bluetooth devices.
Tethering & portable hotspot
This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data
connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Mobile Hotspot
Note: To enable Mobile Hotspot on your phone, dial 611 or go
to att.com/mywireless to set up the service.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
– or –
➔ Mobile Hotspot
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot ➔
Mobile Hotspot.
Connections
2. Turn Mobile Hotspot on by tapping the slider so that it
changes to the ON position
.
The Mobile Hotspot icon
your screen.
is displayed at the top of
3. Tap Configure, to configure your Mobile Hotspot
settings.
4. Tap Allowed devices to set up the devices that you will
allow to use your Mobile Hotspot.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Mobile
Hotspot.
USB tethering
Note: To enable USB tethering on your phone, dial 611 or go to
att.com/mywireless to set up the service.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot.
Connections
2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.
Changing Your Settings
88
3. Tap USB tethering to add a checkmark and activate the
feature. The USB tethering icon
is displayed at the
top of your screen.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use USB tethering.
Help
From the Tethering and portable hotspot menu, Press
➔ Help for additional information
Airplane mode
The Airplane mode icon
your screen.
is displayed at the top of
Data Usage
From this screen you can view your Mobile data usage and
turn your Mobile data capability On or Off.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Data usage.
Connections
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and turn Mobile
data usage on.
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are
in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving
calls or data is prohibited.
3. Tap Set mobile data limit to create a checkmark and
allow a data limit to be set.
Important! When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot
send or receive any calls or access online
information or applications.
5. Tap the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and select a
date.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections.
➔ Settings ➔
Connections
2. Tap the Airplane mode checkbox to create a checkmark
and activate the feature.
3. At the Turn on airplane mode prompt, tap OK.
89
4. Touch and drag the orange limit bar to the GB limit that
you desire.
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of
how much data was used per application.
Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider
may account for data usage differently.
6. Press
to display additional options. Tap to activate.
• Data roaming: enables data roaming on your device.
• Use wireless networks: allows applications to use data from
mobile networks and Wi-Fi to help determine your location.
• Restrict background data: restricts some apps and services
from working unless you are connected to a Wi-Fi network.
• Auto sync data: allows your accounts to automatically sync
• Show Wi-Fi usage: displays a Wi-Fi tab that shows Wi-Fi
usage.
• Mobile hotspots: displays available mobile hotspots.
Location services
• My places: allows you to add location information for your
Home, Office, and Car.
More networks
This option displays additional Connectivity information.
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks.
Connections
Options display for Mobile networks and VPN.
The Location services settings allow you to set up how the
phone will determine your location and the sensor settings
for your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Location services.
Connections
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the service:
• Access to my location: allows apps that have asked your
permission to use your location information.
• Use GPS satellites: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint
your location.
Mobile networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find
your location or search for places of interest, you must
enable the Mobile networks options.
Mobile data
To enable data access over the mobile network, this option
must be selected. It is set on by default.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
Connections
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and activate the
feature.
Changing Your Settings
90
Data Roaming
Network Operators
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service
provider’s partner networks and access data services when
you are out of your service providers area of coverage.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
Using this feature you can view the current network
connection. You can also scan and select a network operator
manually, or set the network selection to Automatic.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
2. Tap Data roaming to create a checkmark and activate
the feature.
2. Tap Network operators.
The current network connection displays at the bottom
of the list.
Connections
Access Point Names
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point
(hotspot).
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
Connections
Important! You must deactivate data service prior to searching
for an available network.
Connections
2. Tap Access Point Names.
A list of the Access Point names display. The active
access point displays a green, filled circle to the right
of the name.
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer
speed and time.
Default setup options
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically
search for an available network. You can set this option to
Manual to select a network each time you connect.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
Connections
91
VPN settings
2. Tap Network operators.
3. Tap Default setup.
4. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network
manually, or tap Automatic to allow the device to
automatically select a network.
Search for AT&T MicroCell
If you have purchased the AT&T Microcell you can set your
network to use it.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Mobile networks ➔
Network operators.
Connections
2. Tap Search for AT&T MicroCell.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note: For additional information please contact your AT&T
service representative.
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and
configure one.
Adding a Basic VPN
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),
L2TP(Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol)/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key
based L2TP/IPSec), L2TP/IPSec RSA (Public key based L2TP/
IPSec), IPSec Xauth (Cross authentication) PSK, IPSec Xauth
RSA, or IPSec Hybrid (authentication) RSA.
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock
PIN or password. For more information, refer to “Lock
Screen Settings” on page 100.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ VPN.
Connections
3. Tap Basic VPN.
4. Tap
Add.
5. Enter a name for the VPN network in the Name field.
Changing Your Settings
92
6. Select a VPN type from the Type drop-down menu. The
options are:
• PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
5. Enter a password, confirm the password, and tap OK.
• L2TP/IPSec PSK (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol / Internet Protocol
Security Pre-Shared Key)
6. Enter a name for the VPN connection in the VPN
connection name field.
• L2TP/IPSec RSA
• IPSec Xauth PSK
7. Select a IPsec connection type from the drop-down
menu.
• IPSec Xauth RSA
8. Enter any other required information.
• IPSec Hybrid RSA
9. Tap Show advanced options to display additional VPN
options.
7. Enter the Server address and any other required fields
that are dependent upon the Type you entered
previously.
8. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display
additional VPN options.
9. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.
Adding an IPsec VPN
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock
PIN or password. For more information, refer to “Lock
Screen Settings” on page 100.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ VPN.
93
3. Tap Advanced IPsec VPN.
4. Tap Add VPN Connection.
Connections
10. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.
NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when
you touch your device with another compatible device. This
is used for applications such as Android Beam and S Beam.
To activate NFC, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ NFC.
➔ Settings ➔
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the NFC
field, to turn NFC ON
.
Nearby devices
Android Beam
When Android Beam is activated, you can beam app content
to another NFC-capable device by holding the devices close
together. You can beam browser pages, YouTube videos,
contacts, and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ NFC ➔ Android Beam.
Connections
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Android Beam ON
.
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby
devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer
to “Activating Wi-Fi” on page 86.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Nearby devices.
Connections
3. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Nearby devices on
.
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFCcapable device and the content is transferred.
4. Verify
screen.
S Beam
(Nearby devices) appears at the top of the
5. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap OK.
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.
You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music
files from your Music app, and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ S Beam.
6. Tap Shared contents, then check the media you would
like to share. Tap OK.
7. Tap Allowed devices list, then select the connected
devices you would like to allow.
Connections
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn S Beam on
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFCcapable device and the content is transferred.
.
8. Tap Not-allowed devices list, then select the connected
devices you would like to not allow.
9. Tap Download to, then select the destination of any
downloaded (shared) content. Choose from Device or
SD card.
Changing Your Settings
94
10. Tap Upload from other devices, then select the actions
you’ll take when you upload content from other
devices. Choose from either Always accept, Always
ask, or Always reject.
Screen Mirroring
Note: This feature requires the optional AllShare Cast dongle
which is available as an accessory. See your AT&T
Customer Service Representative for more information.
Connections
2. Connect the AllShare Cast dongle to the HDMI device
using an HDMI A-to-A cable.
3. Press
➔ Help for information on using Screen
Mirroring.
95
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone.
From the Home screen, tap
Device ➔ Sound.
➔ Settings ➔
Device
The following options display:
The Screen Mirroring feature allows you to share the media
files on your device screen with an HDMI device such as an
HDMI TV.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Screen Mirroring.
Sound Settings
Volume
The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all
phone sounds in one easy location.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Sound ➔ Volume.
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume
for Music, video, games and other media, Ringtone,
Notifications, and System.
3. Tap OK.
Vibration intensity
Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the
vibration is for different options.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Sound ➔ Vibration intensity.
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration
intensity for Incoming call, Notification, and Haptic
feedback.
3. Tap OK.
Ringtones
This option allows you to set the ringtone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Sound.
Device
2. Tap Ringtones.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK.
– or –
Tap Add to select a file from your music files.
Vibrations
This option allows you to set your phone to vibrate and ring.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Sound.
Tap Create and follow the on-screen instructions to
create your own vibration.
Default notification sound
This option allows you to set the default ringtone that will
sound for notifications and alarms.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Sound.
2. Tap Default notification sound.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK.
Vibrate when ringing
This option allows you to enable your phone to vibrate
whenever it rings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Sound.
Device
2. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark and
enable the feature.
2. Tap Vibrations.
3. Select a vibration pattern and tap OK.
– or –
Changing Your Settings
96
System Tone Settings
Samsung Keyboard Settings
The System tone settings are used when you use the dialing
pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the
screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Sound.
The Samsung keyboard settings are used when you use the
dialing pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap
the screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Sound.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the feature:
• Dialing keypad tone: makes a sound when you tap a key on
the keyboard.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the feature:
• Key-tap sound: makes a sound when you tap a key on the
Samsung keyboard.
• Touch sounds: makes a sound when you touch the screen.
• Screen lock sound: makes a sound when your screen is
locked or unlocked.
• Haptic feedback: makes a vibration when you tap soft keys
and on certain UI interactions.
• Pen attach/detach sound: allows you to select a sound that
will be heard whenever the S Pen is attached or detached from
the phone. Choose Off or 3 different sounds.
97
• Key-tap vibration: makes a vibration when you tap a key on
the Samsung keyboard.
Audio Output
This sound feature configures the audio output.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Sound ➔ Audio output.
2. Choose from either Stereo or Surround.
Device
Adapt sound
The Adapt sound feature allows you to customize your call
sounds.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Sound ➔ Adapt sound.
2. Read the instructions and tap Start.
Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your personal call
sound.
Display Settings
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display.
From the Home screen, tap
Device ➔ Display.
➔ Settings ➔
Device
The following options display:
• Brightness allows you to configure the LCD Brightness levels.
– Tap Automatic brightness to allow the device to self-adjust
and tap OK.
- or Touch and slide the on-screen slider to adjust the
level and tap OK.
• Screen timeout: allows you to adjust the delay time before the
screen automatically turns off. Make an available selection.
Choices include: 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute,
3 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes.
• Touch key light duration: allows you to adjust the delay before
the Touch key light automatically turns off.
• Screen mode: allows you to select from several different color
modes.
• Reading mode: allows you to activate an optimized reading
mode for selected applications. This menu allows you to assign
available applications (such as Calculator, Camera, Contacts,
etc...) for enhancement using the Reader mode. Tap the OFF /
ON icon next to Reading mode to turn it on
.
• Auto adjust screen tone: adjusts the phone’s LCD brightness
level to automatically adjust and conserve battery power.
• Daydream: allows you to control what your screen does when
your device is docked or sleeping. Tap the OFF / ON icon next
to Daydream to turn it on
. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
Changing Your Settings
98
• Auto rotate screen when enabled, this feature, allows the
device to automatically switch from portrait to landscape
orientation and vice versa. When this setting is disabled, the
device displays in portrait mode only.
• Show battery percentage when enabled, displays of battery
charge percentage atop the battery icon at the top of the
screen.
• Edit after screen capture when enabled, this feature takes
you to the Edit screen after capturing a screen image.
Multi window
This option to enable/disable the automatic Multi window
feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device.
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Multi window to the right
to turn it on
.
3. Tap the Open in multi window view field to
automatically view content in multi window when you
open files from My Files or Video, or attachments from
emails and messages.
99
LED indicator
This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging,
missed events, and incoming notifications. The light will turn
on by default unless you turn them off.
From the Home screen, tap
Device ➔ LED indicator.
➔ Settings ➔
Device
4. Tap the following LED indicator options to turn them on
or off:
• Charging: LED lights up when the device is connected to the
charger.
• Low battery: LED lights up when the battery level is low.
• Notifications: LED lights up when you have missed calls,
messages, or application events.
• Voice recording: LED lights up when you are recording voice.
The LED only lights up when the screen is off.
Lock Screen Settings
Lock screen options
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more
information about using the lock and unlock features, see
“Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen” on page 11.
Screen Lock
1. From the Home screen, tap
Device ➔ Lock screen.
➔ Settings ➔
Device
2. Tap Screen lock for these options then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your Screen lock:
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.
• Signature: Write your signature to unlock it.
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or
change your screen unlock pattern.
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will
never lock.
Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions.
Note: The Lock screen options will differ depending on what
type of Screen Lock you have selected in step 2.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Device ➔ Lock screen.
➔ Settings ➔
Device
2. The following options are available depending on the
Screen Lock type that you have selected:
Swipe options
• Multiple widgets allows you to display multiple widgets on
your lock screen. Appears as an options after a lock mode is
enabled.
• Clock widget options allows you to show the dual clock on the
lock screen, adjust the Clock size, and show the date.
• Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock
screen. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
.
• Personal message allows you to enter a customized
personalized message that is displayed on the lock screen.
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
.
Changing Your Settings
100
• Owner information allows you enter text to display on the lock
screen.
• Accuracy level allows you to set how accurate the signature
should be. Select High, Medium, or Low.
• Unlock effect sets the effect you receive when unlocking the
device. You can select None, Watercolor, or Ripple.
• Secured lock time locks the screen instantly when the screen
times out or the power key is pressed.
• Ink effect sets the coloring for the on-screen ink used in
writing/drawing.
• Action Memo on lock screen allows you to open the Action
Memo when double tapping the lock screen with S Pen.
• Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to
wake-up your phone.
• Action Memo on lock screen allows you to open the Action
Memo when double tapping the lock screen with S Pen.
• Help text shows help information on the Lock screen.
Signature options
• Clock widget options allows you to show the dual clock on the
lock screen, adjust the Clock size, and show the date.
• Personal message allows you to enter a customized
personalized message that is displayed on the lock screen.
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
.
• Owner information allows you enter text to display on the lock
screen.
• Make signature visible allows your signature to be visible
while you are writing.
101
Pattern options
• Clock widget options allows you to show the dual clock on the
lock screen, adjust the Clock size, and show the date.
• Personal message allows you to enter a customized
personalized message that is displayed on the lock screen.
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
.
• Owner information allows you enter text to display on the lock
screen.
• Make pattern visible allows your pattern to be visible while
you are writing.
• Unlock effect allows you to set the effect that occurs as you
unlock your phone. Select None, or Watercolor.
• Secured lock time locks the screen instantly when the screen
times out or the power key is pressed.
• Action Memo on lock screen allows you to open the Action
Memo when double tapping the lock screen with S Pen.
PIN and Password options
• Clock widget options allows you to show the dual clock on the
lock screen, adjust the Clock size, and show the date.
• Personal message allows you to enter a customized
personalized message that is displayed on the lock screen.
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
.
• Owner information allows you enter text to display on the lock
screen.
• Secured lock time locks the screen instantly when the screen
times out or the power key is pressed.
• Action Memo on lock screen allows you to open the Action
Memo when double tapping the lock screen with S Pen.
Wallpaper
The Wallpaper settings option allows you to set the Wallpaper
for your Home screen, Lock screen, or both.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Wallpaper.
2. Select an available option to change its current
wallpaper.
For more information, refer to “Changing the Wallpaper” on
page 40.
Font
This function adjusts the delay time before the screen
automatically turns off.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Font.
Device
2. The following Font options are available:
• Font style: sets the fonts used on the LCD display. Select a font
or tap Get fonts online to download additional fonts.
• Font size: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.
Notification Panel
This feature allows you to set the brightness of your
notification panel and also select the quick setting buttons
that you want to display at the top of the notification panel.
For more information, refer to “Notification Panel” on page
42.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Notification panel.
2. Enable the Brightness adjustment field to activate the
ability to adjust the screen brightness via the
notification panel.
Changing Your Settings
102
To customize the notification panel quick access buttons:
1. Access the Notification Panel screen.
• The set of buttons within the Notification panel area are those
that are available within the Notifications panel. They provide
quick access to available features. These can be customized by
the user.
2. Replace existing notification panel buttons by:
• In a single motion, touch and drag an available button from the
bottom of the screen into a location within the Notification
panel area.
• One of the 10 default buttons is then replaced with the new
selection.
3. Tap Reset to restore the Notification Panel buttons to
their original configuration.
Easy Mode
This application allows you to leave your display using the
default layout of Standard mode or provide an easier user
experience for the first-time smartphone users using Easy
mode.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Easy mode.
103
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Easy mode to the right to
turn it on
.
Accessibility
Accessibility services are special features to make using the
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.
Note: You can download accessibility applications from Play
Store and manage their use here.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Device ➔ Accessibility.
➔ Settings ➔
Device
2. The following options are available:
• Auto rotate screen: automatically rotate the screen from
landscape to portrait when you rotate your phone.
• Screen timeout: timeout the accessibility feature after a
defined amount of time.
• Speak passwords: reads out password information.
• Answering/ending calls: accept incoming calls by pressing
the home key or end calls using the power key.
• Easy touch mode: allows you to easily tap the screen to stop
snooze alarms, calendar events and timers, and accept/reject
incoming calls.
• Font size: change the size of the fonts used on the device
within menus, options, etc. Choose from: Tiny, Extra small,
Small, Medium, Large, Extra large, or Huge.
• Show shortcut: allow the accessibility shortcut under the
device options to be used by pressing and holding the power
key.
• Magnification gestures: use exaggerated gestures such as
triple-tapping, double pinching, and dragging two fingers
across the screen.
• Manage accessibility: save and update your accessibility
settings or share them with another device. You can export your
settings, import a previously saved file, or share your file with
another device.
• Negative colors: reverse the display of on-screen colors from
White text on a Black background to Black text on a White
background.
• TalkBack: activate the TalkBack feature.
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback
to help blind and low-vision users.
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,
except passwords, including personal data and
credit card numbers. It may also log your user
interface interactions with the device.
• Color adjustment: allows you to adjust the display colors if
you are color blind and have difficulty reading the display
because of the colors. Touch and slide the slider to the right to
turn it on
. Follow the on-screen instructions.
• Notification reminder: plays a beep when you have unread
notifications. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
.
• Accessibility shortcut: allows you to quickly enable
accessibility features in 2 quick steps. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
Changing Your Settings
104
• Text-to-speech options: allows you to adjust your text-tospeech settings. For more information, refer to “Speech
Settings” on page 116.
• Sound balance: allows you to use the slider to set the Left
and Right balance when using a stereo device.
• Mono audio: allows you to enable stereo audio to be
compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a
single earbud/earphone.
• Turn off all sounds: allows you to mute every sound made by
the device during taps, selections, notifications, etc.
• Hearing aids: allows you to improve the sound quality of your
device for use with hearing aids.
• Flash notification: allows you to set your camera light to blink
whenever you receive a notification.
• Assistant menu: allows you to improve the device
accessibility for users with reduced dexterity. Touch and slide
the slider to the right to turn it on
. Follow the onscreen instructions.
• Press and hold delay: allows you to select a time interval for
this action. Choose from: Short, Medium, Long, or Custom.
105
• Interaction control: allows you to enable or disable motions
and screen timeout. You can also block areas of the screen
from touch interaction. Touch and slide the slider to the right to
turn it on
. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Call Settings
To access the Call settings menu:
From the Home screen, tap
Device ➔ Call.
– or –
➔ Settings ➔
From the Home screen, tap
settings.
➔
➔ Call
Device
Call rejection
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Call ➔ Call rejection.
3. Tap Save to save the reject message.
Device
Answering/ending calls
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Call ➔ Answering/ending calls.
2. Tap Auto reject mode and tap one of the following
options:
• Off: to turn Auto reject mode off.
2. The following options are available:
• The home key answers calls: Tap this option to be able to
accept incoming calls by pressing the Home key.
• All numbers: to reject all calls.
• Auto reject numbers: to reject all calls in your Reject list.
• Voice control: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming
calls by using your voice.
3. Tap Auto reject list.
4. Tap
Set up call rejection messages
2. Tap
– or –
• The power key ends calls: This option will allow you to end a
call by pressing the power key without turning off the screen.
to manually add numbers to the Reject list.
5. Tap Unknown, to create a checkmark and automatically
reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Call ➔ Set up call rejection messages.
Device
Device
to manually add a reject message.
Turn off screen during calls
This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that
your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Call ➔ Turn off screen during calls to create a
checkmark and enable the feature.
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed
when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the
message if desired.
Changing Your Settings
106
Call alerts
1. From the Home screen, tap
Device ➔ Call ➔ Call alerts.
Call Accessories
➔ Settings ➔
Device
2. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and
activate the features:
• Answer vibration: enables your phone to vibrate when the
called party answers the phone.
• Call-end vibration: enables your phone to vibrate when the
call ends.
• Call connect tone: plays a tone when a call is connected.
• Minute minder: beeps twice every minute that you are on a
call.
• Call end tone: plays a tone when a call is ended.
• Alerts on call: turns on alarm and message notifications during
a call.
Incoming call notifications
This option allows on pop-up notifications for incoming voice
calls when the screen is on.
107
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Call ➔ Incoming call notifications to create a
checkmark and enable the feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Call ➔ Call accessories.
Device
2. The following options are available:
• Automatic answering: configures the device to automatically
answer and incoming call when a headset is detected.
• Automatic answering timer: configures the time delay before
the device automatically accepts the incoming call.
• Outgoing call conditions: allows you to make calls even when
the device is locked.
Additional settings
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings.
Device
2. Tap one of the following options:
• Caller ID: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be
displayed. Select Network default, Hide number, or Show
number.
• Call forwarding: allows you to forward your calls to another
number.
• Auto area code: allows you to automatically prepend a specific
area code to all outbound calls.
• Call waiting: the network service informs you when someone
is trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate.
• Auto redial: automatically redials the last number if the call
was either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate.
• Fixed dialing numbers: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to
a limited set of phone numbers.
Using Fixed Dialing Numbers
Enabling FDN
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings ➔ Fixed dialing
numbers.
Important! Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card
does not, this menu does not display.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering
an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to
lock. Contact customer service for assistance.
Changing the PIN2 Code
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings ➔ Fixed dialing
numbers.
2. Tap Change PIN2.
2. Tap Turn on FDN.
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK.
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.
FDN is enabled.
4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap Turn off
FDN, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK.
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.
Managing the FDN List
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to
phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.
Note: Before you can manage an FDN list a list must be
created.
Changing Your Settings
108
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings ➔ Fixed dialing
numbers.
• Adapt sound: allows you to customize your sounds. Follow the
on-screen instructions to set up your personal call sound.
2. Tap FDN list.
• Clear sound: plays a clear distinct sound.
• Soft sound: plays a soft quite sound.
3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed.
Ringtones and keypad tones
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Call ➔ Ringtones and keypad tones.
• Off: turns off all sounds during a call.
Noise reduction
Device
2. Tap Ringtones, select a ringtone, and tap OK.
This option helps to suppress background noise from your
side during a call.
3. Tap Vibrations, select a vibration type, and tap OK.
4. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark if you
want your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming.
5.
Tap Keypad tones to create a checkmark if you want
tones to play when the keypad is pressed.
Personalize call sound
This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear
during a call with and without earphones.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Call ➔ Personalize call sound.
2. At the Personalize call sound display, tap one of the
following options:
109
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Call ➔ Noise reduction to create a
checkmark and enable the feature.
Device
Increase volume in pocket
This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is
in a pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its
location.
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Call ➔ Increase volume in pocket to create a
checkmark and enable the feature.
Voicemail service
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Call ➔ Voicemail Service.
3.
Device
Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the
default.
2. Tap My carrier to remove the carrier Voicemail service.
Voicemail settings
You can view or modify your voicemail number from this
menu.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Call ➔ Voicemail settings.
2. Tap the Voice mail number field, backspace to erase the
digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the
keypad, then tap OK.
3. Tap OK.
Sound
You can select a unique ringtone for Voicemail alerts.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Device ➔ Call ➔ Sound.
Device
Select a ringtone and tap OK.
Vibrate
This option allows you select vibration settings for Voicemail
alerts.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Call.
2. Tap Vibrate to create a checkmark and activate the
Vibrate feature.
TTY Mode
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities,
to communicate by telephone.
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please
check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure
that it is compatible with digital cell phones.
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable
that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was
not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.
2. Tap a ringtone to hear it played.
Changing Your Settings
110
1. From the Home screen, tap
Device ➔ Call ➔ TTY mode.
➔ Settings ➔
Device
you would like to enable.
2. Tap TTY Full, TTY HCO, or TTY VCO. A green checkmark
will appear. Tap TTY Off to turn it off.
Hearing aids
2. Tap Hearing aids to create a checkmark and enable the
Hearing aid compatibility feature.
Blocking Mode
When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected
features will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of
incoming calls from people on your allowed list.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Blocking mode.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Blocking mode
.
Confirm that the Blocking mode active icon
appears in the Status bar.
111
4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active.
Remove the checkmark from the Always field to
configure the From and To time fields.
This option allows you to turn on Hearing aid compatibility on
your device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Device
Device ➔ Call.
slider to the right to turn it on
3. Place a green checkmark adjacent to those features
5. Tap Allowed contacts to assign those contacts that are
exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All
contacts, Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts will
then appear in the Allowed contact list.
Language and input
This menu allows you to configure the language in which to
display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard
options.
Language
You can change the language used by your device by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ Language and input ➔ Language.
2. Tap a language from the list.
Controls
Keyboards and Input Methods
You can change the keyboard used by your device by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ Language and input.
3. Set any of the following options:
• Input languages settings is used to setup the language you
will be using for input.
Controls
in the Select input languages option below, will be displayed
here.
2. Tap Default and select a keyboard.
– Select input languages sets the input language. Tap a
Select Samsung keyboard or Swype.
3. Tap Set up input methods.
icon next to the input method that you
4. Tap the
would like to configure the settings for.
Based on your selection of input method, the
appropriate settings will appear and are explained
below.
Samsung Keyboard settings
Controls
icon next to Samsung keyboard.
language from the available list. The keyboard is updated to the
selected language.
• Smart typing settings provides access to additional typing
settings.
– Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode. This must
be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and
hold to access the advanced settings.
– Auto replacement automatically completes or replaces the
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ Language and input.
2. Tap the
– English is the default language. Whatever language you select
current word with the most probable word match after
tapping the space bar or entering a punctuation mark.
– Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of
the first word in each sentence (standard English style).
– Auto spacing automatically inserts space between words.
Changing Your Settings
112
– Auto punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence
• More settings provides access to additional access to more
settings.
by tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen
QWERTY keyboard.
– Pen detection enables the device to automatically switch to
• Keyboard swipe: allows you to combine the Samsung
keyboard with an additional input method choose from:
handwriting mode when the S Pen is detected.
– Help launches a brief on-screen help tutorial covering the main
– None leaves text input as only via the on-screen keyboard.
– SwiftKey Flow like using Swipe, allows you to enter text by
sliding your fingers across the on-screen keyboard. This feature
is optimized for use with the on-screen QWERTY keyboard.
– Cursor control when enabled, allows you to control your
on-screen cursor by moving your finger across the keyboard.
• Key-tap feedback provides feedback functions to be enabled
such as:
– Sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an
on-screen key.
– Vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an
on-screen key.
– Character preview provides an automatic preview of the
current character selection within the text string. This is helpful
when multiple characters are available within one key.
113
concepts related to the Samsung keyboard.
– Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their
original configuration.
Predictive Text Settings
From this menu you can set Predictive Text settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ Language and input.
2. Tap the
3.
Controls
icon next to Samsung keyboard.
Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Predictive text field, to turn it ON
.
4. Tap Predictive text.
5. The following options are available:
• Live word update allows the device to automatically update its
word database with popular new words every day.
• Personalized data activate this feature to use the personal
language data that you have entered and selected to make
your text entry prediction results better. By enabling this feature
you can choose from the following personalization features:
• Learn from Facebook allows you to log into your current
Facebook account and add used text to your personal
dictionary.
• Learn from Gmail: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail
account from where your style and existing contact information
is added to your personal dictionary. Helps recognize familiar
names.
• Learn from Twitter allows you to sign into your existing Twitter
account and add used text to your personal dictionary.
• Learn from Messages allows your device to learn your
messaging style by using your Messaging information.
• Learn from Contacts updates predictive style by learning your
Contacts style.
• Clear remote data allows you to delete your anonymous data
stored on the personalization server.
• Clear personal data removes all personalized data entered by
the user.
• Privacy displays on-screen privacy information.
Swype Keypad Settings
To configure Swype settings:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ Language and input.
2. Tap the
Controls
icon next to Swype.
3. Tap Settings on the left side of the screen to alter these
settings:
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you
enter text using the keypad.
• Sound on keypress: turns on sounds generated by the Swype
application.
• Pop-up on keypress: displays the character above the key
when typing.
• Show complete trace: once enabled, sets wether or not to
display the complete Swype path.
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of
every sentence.
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start
the next word.
Changing Your Settings
114
• Next word prediction: once enabled, predicts the next word in
your text string based on your current text entries.
• Show Voice key: once enabled, displays the Voice icon on
your Swype keyboard so you can use the Voice input option.
4. Tap My Words on the left side of the screen to access
the following options:
• Backup & Sync: allows you to backup your Swype dictionary
and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices.
• Living Language: when enabled, this feature automatically
updates your Swype dictionary with popular new words.
• Social integration: allows you to learn information from your
Facebook, Twitter, and Gmail accounts to help you while using
Swype.
• Edit my dictionary: allows you to edit your personal Swype
dictionary.
• Clear language data: deletes all of your personal language
data, including your words.
• Contribute usage data: when enabled, allows the Nuance®
application to collect usage data for better word predictions.
115
• Cellular data: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by
the Swype application so it can receive program updates,
language downloads, and other related features via your
existing data connection.
5. Tap Languages on the left side of the screen to activate
and select the current text input language. Default
language is English. Touch Download languages, to
download additional languages.
6. Tap Gestures on the left side of the screen to view
helpful information on using gestures while using
Swype.
7. Tap Help on the left side of the screen to see the
following options:
• How to Swype: provides tips on how to learn to use Swype.
• Show helpful tips: once enabled, displays helpful tips and
hints as you are using Swype.
• Version: displays the software version information.
8. Tap Updates on the left side of the screen to download
any new Swype updates. If an update is available, it
will display under the updates heading. If no updates
are displayed, then check back later to see any
available updates.
Google voice typing settings
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ Language and input.
Controls
2. Tap the
icon next to Google voice typing.
3. The following options are available:
• Choose input languages: tap on a language that you want to
input. Select Automatic to use the local language or select a
language from the list.
• Block offensive words: tap to create a checkmark and enable
the blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of
your voice-input Google typing.
• Download offline speech recognition: Enables voice input
while offline.
Handwriting Recognition Settings
This menu allows you to set the speech settings for
Handwriting recognition.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ Language and input.
Controls
2. Tap Language under the Handwriting recognition
heading.
3. To change the default language of English, tap More
languages and select a language.
Speech Settings
This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice
input.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ Language and input.
Controls
2. Tap Voice recognizer to select either Samsung powered
by Vlingo or Google (default).
3. Tap Voice search to configure the following:
• Language: Choose a language for your voice input.
• Speech output: Sets whether you will use speech output
always or only when using hands-free.
Changing Your Settings
116
• Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input
Google searches.
• Hotword detection: Enable to being able to launch voice
search by saying the word “Google”.
• Download offline speech recognition: Enables voice input
while offline.
• Bluetooth headset: allows you to record audio through a
Bluetooth headset if available.
4. Tap Text-to-speech options and select Samsung text-tospeech engine.
5. Tap
next to the preferred TTS engine configure the
following settings:
• Language: allows you to set the language for spoken text.
• Settings for Samsung text-to-speech engine allows you to
view Open Source Licenses.
• Install voice data: allows you to install voice data for speech
synthesis.
6. Scroll down to the General section to access the
following options:
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.
117
• Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis
(available if voice data is installed).
Pointer speed
This option sets your Pointer speed for your mouse or
trackpad when you are using a keyboard dock accessory.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ Language and input.
Controls
2. Tap Pointer speed then drag the slider to the right to go
faster or to the left to go slower.
3. Tap OK to save your setting.
Voice control
The Voice control settings allow you to set up voice
commands to control your device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ Voice control.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to activate Voice control.
Controls
at the top of your screen
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to
create a checkmark and activate the feature.
• Incoming calls: allows you to answer or reject calls using the
commands Answer and Reject.
• Alarm: allows you to stop or snooze an alarm by using the
commands Stop and Snooze.
• Camera: allows you to take pictures using the voice
commands Capture, Shoot, Smile, or Cheese.
• Music: allows you to control your Music app using the voice
commands Next, Previous, Play, Pause, Volume up, and
Volume down.
Note: If you set the alert type for calls or alarms to vibration,
voice control will not be available.
All incoming calls and notifications will be read out
automatically.
3. The following options are available:
• Incoming call: read out callers’ information when receiving
incoming calls.
• Air call-accept: wave your hand over the screen to accept
incoming calls.
• Message: read out senders’ information when receiving
incoming calls.
• Alarm: read out alarm information when alarms sound.
Hands-free Mode
When Hands-free mode is enabled, incoming calls and
notifications will be read out automatically.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ Hands-free mode.
• Schedule: read out scheduled alarm information when alarms
sound.
Controls
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Driving mode to the right
to turn it on
4. You can disable Driving mode by saying “Driving mode
off” while in S voice, or by accessing the Settings
menu and sliding the Hands-free mode slider to the off
position
or by using the Notification panel.
.
Confirm that the Driving mode active icon
appears in the Status bar.
Changing Your Settings
118
S Pen Settings
One-handed operation
This menu allows you to customize settings for the S Pen.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ S Pen.
Controls
2. The following options are available:
• Turn off pen detection: allows you to deactivate pen detection
• S Pen keeper: allows to enable a a sound alert and on-screen
notification when you walk around with the device without the
pen inserted in its slot.
• Pointer: allows you to activate the ability to show the pointer
when you hover the S Pen over the screen.
• Direct pen input: displays the handwriting pad within the text
input area when the S Pen is detected.
• Pen detachment options: allows you activate a selected action
when the device detects the S Pen is detached. Choose from:
None, Action Memo, or Air command.
• Pen attach/detach sound: allows you to select a sound to be
played whenever the pen is attached or detached.
The one-handed operation settings help you to use your
phone keypads easily with only one hand.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls ➔ One-handed operation.
Controls
2. The following options are available:
• Use for all screens: configures selected options for all
available screens. This feature adjusts the scale and position of
all screens by swiping the edge of the current screen.
• Keypad and in-call buttons: activate the feature to adjust the
position of the dialing keyboard and in-call buttons for
one-handed operation.
• Samsung keyboard: activate the feature to adjust the position
of the Samsung keyboard for one-handed operation.
• Calculator: activate the feature to adjust the position of the
Samsung calculator for one-handed operation.
• Unlock pattern: activate to adjust the scale of the unlock
pattern screen for use with one hand.
• Learn about one-handed operation: provides an on-screen
tutorial for the use of these one-handed features/functions.
119
Motions and Gestures
The Motions and Gestures settings allow you to set up
various Motion activation services. For more information on
using gestures, see “Using Gestures” on page 29.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls.
Controls
Caution! Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause
unintended results.
2. The following options are available:
• Air gesture: allows you to control your device by performing
motions above the sensor (without touching the device).
• Air view: displays helpful information when you hover your
finger over the screen.
• Air command: allows you to activate or deactivate the Air
command function that appears on-screen once you remove
the S Pen from its internal slot.
• Motions: allows you to control your device using natural
movements (on the screen).
• Palm motion: allows you to control your device by touching the
screen with your entire hand.
• Smart screen: allows you to control your device by using
intelligent face detection features such as: Smart stay, Smart
rotation, Smart pulse, and Smart scroll.
• Increase touch sensitivity: allows you to increase the screen’s
touch sensitivity.
To activate Air gesture:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Controls tab.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Air gesture slider
to the right to turn it on.
If the feature is available for your selected action, an
Air gesture icon
will appear in the status bar.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK.
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Air gesture
can be activated.
4. Tap Learn about sensor and icon field to review
on-screen information about the Air gestures sensor
and related icon.
5. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to
the on position.
Changing Your Settings
120
The following is a description some of the most commonly
used gestures:
• Quick glance: Once enabled, you can move your hand over the
air gesture sensor (located above the on-screen clock at the
upper-right) to temporarily activate preview window that can be
used to display selected user-enabled information such as:
Time & Date, Notification icons, Missed calls, etc.
• Air jump: Once enabled, you can move your hand over the air
gesture sensor (up or down) and easily jump to either the top or
bottom of a lengthy display page (ex: Internet or Email).
• Air browse: Once enabled, you can move your hand over the air
gesture sensor (left or right) and easily move to either the
previous or next item in a series (ex: music tracks, pictures, or
pages).
• Air call-accept: Once enabled, you can simply wave your hand
over the air gesture sensor to accept any incoming call.
To activate Air View:
With the Air view feature, you can hover your finger over the
screen and Air view features will be displayed. For example,
you can hover your finger over a scheduled item in your
calendar to see more details.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls.
Controls
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Air view slider to
the right to turn it on.
3. Tap the Air view mode field to select the method used
to activate the feature. Choose from Pen, Finger, or
Auto.
4. Tap the Air view pen options field and configure the
available options:
• Information preview: allows you to see information previews,
extended text, and enlarged images when you hover your
S Pen over the screen.
Note: It is recommended that the Information preview function
be enabled if using Air view.
121
• Progress preview: allows you to preview a scene or show
elapsed time when you hover your S Pen over the progress bar
while watching a video.
• Speed dial preview: allows you to see the contacts and their
speed dial numbers when you hover your S Pen over them in
your contacts list.
• Icon labels (by pen nib): activate the ability to hover over an
icon and display an on-screen pop up description.
• List scrolling: allows you to enable the ability to scroll up and
down a screen by holding the S Pen over the edge of the
screen.
• Sound and haptic feedback: allows you to play sound and
feel vibration when you hover your S Pen over Air view items.
5. When enabled via the Air view mode menu, tap the
Air view finger options field and configure the available
options.
To activate Air Command:
With the Air command feature active, the Air Command
button toolbar appears once you remove the S Pen from its
slot. This toolbar allows you to quickly activate frequently
used applications or actions.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls.
Controls
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Air command
slider to the right to turn it on.
To activate Motion:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Controls.
➔ Settings ➔
Controls
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Motions slider to
the right to turn it on.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK.
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Motion can
be activated.
4. The following motions are available:
Changing Your Settings
122
• Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK.
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the
device to your ear.
• Smart alert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and
notified of you have missed any calls or messages.
• Zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content can
be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points on the
display then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out.
• Browse an image: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired
on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to
pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large
on-screen image.
• Mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any playing
sounds by turning the device display down on a surface. This is
the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture.
To activate Palm Motion:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Controls.
➔ Settings ➔
Controls
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Palm motion
slider to the right to turn it on.
123
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Palm
motion can be activated.
4. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to
the on position.
The following is a description some of the most commonly
used gestures:
• Capture screen: Once enabled, you can capture any
on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single
motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form
left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard.
• Mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any
on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering
the screen with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the
screen, the device goes back to normal by either continuing to
play the current video or unmuting the current sound.
To activate Smart Screen:
To Increase touch sensitivity:
The Smart screen options allow you to customize your
screen settings to make the screen more responsive and
easier to use.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls.
Activating this feature allows you to increase the screen’s
sensitivity to touching while wearing gloves.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Controls.
Controls
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Smart screen
slider to the right to turn it on.
3. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the features:
• Smart stay: disables the screen timeout if your phone detects
that your face is watching the screen.
• Smart rotation: disables the auto screen rotation by checking
the orientation of your face and the device.
• Smart pause: pauses videos when your device detects that
your head has moved away from the screen.
• Smart scroll: once your eyes have been detected, the screen
will scroll according to your device’s tilt angle. Tap the adjacent
field to the right of the Smart scroll field to activate the feature.
With Smart scroll, the screen will scroll depending on the
phone’s tilt angle once your eyes have been detected.
Controls
2. Place a check mark alongside the Increase touch
sensitivity field to turn it on.
Add Account
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize
accounts, including your Google and email accounts.
Adding an Account
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
General ➔ Accounts ➔ Add account.
General
2. Tap one of the account types.
3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your
credentials and set up the account.
A green circle will appear next to the account type once
you have created an account. Your account will also be
displayed in the My accounts section of the main
Accounts menu.
Changing Your Settings
124
Removing an Account
3. Tap the account name.
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its
messages, contacts, and other data from the
device.
4. Tap Sync now to synchronize your account or only tap
the Sync items that you want to synchronize.
5. Tap Cancel sync to stop the synchronization.
6. Tap Account settings to access your account settings.
1. From a Home screen, tap
General ➔ Accounts.
➔ Settings ➔
General
2. Tap the account which is located in the My accounts
section.
3. Tap the account name.
4. At the bottom of the screen, tap Remove account, then
tap Remove account at the prompt to remove the
account and delete all its messages, contacts, and
other data.
Synchronizing Accounts
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Accounts.
2. Tap the account which is located in the My accounts
section.
125
7. Tap Storage usage to see your storage usage for
different applications.
Backup and reset
The Back up and reset settings allow you to back up your
data, back up accounts, automatically restore your phone,
and reset your phone settings to the factory settings.
Back Up My Data
By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of
your settings and data.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Back up and reset.
2. Tap Back up my data to enable or disable back up of
application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings
to the Google server.
Backup Account
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the
Backup account option is available.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Back up and reset.
2. Tap Backup account and tap your Google Gmail account
or tap Add account to set your Google Gmail account to
be backed up to the Google server.
Automatic Restore
By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of
your backed up settings and data will be restored.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Back up and reset.
2. Tap Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic
restoration of settings from the Google server.
Factory Data Reset
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings
to the factory default settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Back up and reset.
2. Tap Factory data reset.
The Factory data reset screen displays reset
information.
3. Tap Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform
the reset.
Warning! Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data
from your phone and internal SD card, including your
Google account, system and application data and
settings, and downloaded applications. It will not
erase current system software, bundled
applications, and external SD card files such as
music and photos.
Date and time
This menu allows you to change the current time and date
displayed.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Date and time.
2. Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network to set
the date and time.
3. Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network to set the
time zone.
Changing Your Settings
126
Important! Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set
the rest of the options.
4. Tap Desk home screen display to display the desk home
screen whenever the phone is docked.
4. Tap Set date and tap the up and down arrows to set the
Month, Day, and Year then tap Set.
5. Tap Automatic unlock if you are using a phone cover
and you want your phone to unlock when you open the
cover.
5. Tap Set time and tap the up and down arrows to set the
Hour, Minute, and PM/AM, then tap Set.
6. Tap S View window color to set the window color when
you are using the optional S View protective cover.
6. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.
7. Tap Select info shown cover to select the information
that you want displayed when you are using the
optional S View protective cover.
7. Optional: Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected
the phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.
8. Tap Select date format and tap the date format type.
Accessory Settings
This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when
using a car or desk dock.
1. From the Home screen, tap
General ➔ Accessory.
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or
removing the phone from the dock.
3. Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock
speakers when the phone is docked.
127
General
8. Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or
Surround.
Browser Bar
The Browser Bar enhances your browsing experience by
providing contextual tools and quick access to your favorite
content.
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Browser Bar.
2. Select an option and follow the on-screen instructions
to set up or modify your Browser Bar.
Application Manager
You can download and install applications from Play Store or
create applications using the Android SDK and install them
on your device. Use Application manager settings to manage
applications.
Downloaded
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Application manager.
2. Tap the DOWNLOADED tab to view a list of all the
downloaded applications on your device.
Warning! Because this device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or
any other company, end-users operate these devices
at their own risk.
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the
Downloaded tabs, press
➔ Sort by size or Sort by
name.
Memory Usage
4. To reset your application preferences, press
Reset app preferences.
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running
applications.
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Application manager.
2. Tap DOWNLOADED, SD CARD, RUNNING, or ALL to
display memory usage for that category of
applications.
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.
➔
Note: This will reset the preferences for disabled apps,
disabled app notifications, default applications for
actions, and background data restrictions for apps. You
will not lose any app data.
5. Tap an application to view and update information
about the application, including memory usage, default
settings, and permissions.
Changing Your Settings
128
SD Card
Running Services
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your SD card.
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Application manager.
View and control services running on your device.
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
General ➔ Application manager.
General
2. Tap the SD CARD tab to view a list of all the downloaded
applications on your device.
2. Tap the RUNNING tab. All the applications that are
currently running on the device display.
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the On SD
card tab, press
➔ Sort by size or Sort by name.
3. Tap Show cached processes to display all the cached
processes that are running. Tap Show services in use to
switch back.
4. To reset your application preferences, press
Reset app preferences.
➔
Note: When you Reset app preferences, you will not lose any
app data.
5. Tap an application to view and update information
about the application, including memory usage, default
settings, and permissions.
4. Tap one of the applications to view application
information.
The following options display:
• Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.
Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services
may have undesirable consequences on the
application or Android System.
• Report: Report failure and other application information.
Note: Options vary by application.
129
Battery
Power saving mode
See how much battery power is used for device activities.
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Battery.
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery
usage displays in percentages per application.
2. Tap Screen, Android OS, Cell standby or any other listed
application to view how it is affecting battery use.
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery
use.
3. From the upper-right tap
list.
(Refresh) to update the
4. Tap the Show battery percentage check box to have the
battery percentage displayed on your battery charge
icon on your status bar.
Power saving mode allows you to manage your phone to
conserve power.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Power saving mode.
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Power saving mode to turn
Power saving mode on
.
3. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and
conserve power:
• CPU power saving: allows you to limit the maximum
performance of the CPU.
• Screen power saving: allows you to lower the screen power
level.
• Turn off haptic feedback: allows you to turn off vibration when
you tap or touch the screen.
• Auto enable: automatically turns on Power saving mode when
the battery falls below 20% even if Power saving mode is off.
4. Tap Learn about power saving to learn about various
ways to conserve battery power.
Changing Your Settings
130
Storage
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the
memory card and USB as well as mount or unmount the SD
card.
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD
card, see “Memory Card” on page 43.
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Storage.The available memory displays
under the Total space and Available space headings for
both Device memory and SD card.
SD card
Tap Unmount SD card to unmount your SD card so that
you can safely remove it, then tap OK.
– or –
1. Tap Format SD card to format your SD card. This will
delete all data on your SD card including music, videos,
and photos.
2. Tap Format SD card again.
3. Tap Delete all to continue or press
131
to cancel.
Note: The Format SD card option is only available when your
SD card is mounted.
Security
The Security settings allow you to determine the security
level for your phone.
Encryption
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your phone
each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD
card each time it is connected:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Security.
2. You must first set up a screen lock type if you haven’t
already done so. For more information, refer to “Screen
Lock” on page 100.
3. Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the
displayed help screen.
4. Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption
on SD card data that requires a password be entered
each time the microSD card is connected.
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.
Encryption may take an hour or more.
Set up/change password
Use this option to set up your password when one is first
required or change your current password.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Security ➔ Set up/change password.
2. Enter a new password and tap Confirm.
3. Enter the new password again and tap Confirm.
Set up SIM card lock
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on
your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each
time you use the phone. Using this option you can also
change your SIM PIN number.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Security.
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap
OK.
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change
your SIM PIN code.
4. Tap Change SIM PIN.
5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap OK.
6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap OK.
7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap OK.
Forgotten SIM PIN password
If you enter the wrong SIM PIN more than 3 times, you will
need to contact your AT&T Customer Service Representative
to get the PUK code for your device.
1. Each time you enter a wrong SIM PIN number the
phone will display how many attempts you have
remaining.
2. After the third incorrect attempt, SIM is now disabled,
Enter PUK code to continue. Contact carrier for details
displays and your SIM card is locked.
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock.
Changing Your Settings
132
3. Enter the new PUK code that you received from your
AT&T Customer Service Representative in the PUK code
field.
4. Enter a new PIN code in the Enter a new PIN field and
tap OK.
5. Enter the new PIN code again in the Confirm your new
PIN field and tap OK.
Device Administrators
The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or
more administration applications that control your device for
security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of
stolen). These applications enforce remote or local device
security policies.
Note: While your SIM PIN is locked, you will still be able to
make Emergency calls if necessary.
Some of the features a device administration application
might control are:
• Setting the number of failed password attempts before the
device is restored to factory settings.
Make passwords visible
• Automatically locking the device.
• Restoring factory settings on the device.
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you
touch them while entering passwords.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Security.
2. Tap Make passwords visible to create a checkmark and
enable or disable the display of password characters.
Note: If a device uses multiple enabled administration
applications, the strictest policy is enforced.
1. From the Home screen, tap
General ➔ Security.
➔ Settings ➔
General
2. Tap Device administrators.
3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If
no device administrators are listed, you can download
them from the Play Store.
133
Unknown sources
This feature allows you to download and install non-Market
applications.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Security.
2. Tap Unknown sources.
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.
Warning! Enabling this option causes your phone and personal
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications
from unknown sources.
Verify apps
This feature allows you to either block or warn you before
installing apps that may cause harm to your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Security.
2. Tap Verify apps.
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.
Change security level
This option allows you to set the security level for your
phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Security ➔ Change security level.
2. Select High or Normal (default).
Security policy updates
When you activate this feature, your phone will automatically
check for changes to the security policy and download any
updates to improve security and service.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Security.
2. Tap Security policy updates to create a checkmark and
activate the feature.
Via Wi-Fi only
When you activate this feature, your phone will automatically
check for changes to the security policy and download any
updates to improve security and service but only when
connected to a Wi-Fi network.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Security.
Changing Your Settings
134
2. Tap Via Wi-Fi only to create a checkmark and activate
the feature.
Storage type
This option allows you to select where you will back up your
credentials.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Security ➔ Storage type.
2. Select the backup storage location for your credentials.
Trusted Credentials
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or
remove it.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ Security.
2. Tap Trusted credentials.
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:
• System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed
in the ROM of your device.
• User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.
135
3. Tap a CA certificate to examine its details.
A scrolling screen displays the details.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and tap Turn
off to disable a System certificate or Remove to remove
a User certificate.
Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Disable
button changes to Enable, so you can enable the
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.
5. Tap OK to return to the certificate list.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
About Device
Install from device storage
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.
Note: You must have installed a memory card containing
encrypted certificates to use this feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
General ➔ Security.
➔ Settings ➔
General
2. Tap Install from device storage, then choose a
certificate and follow the prompts to install.
Clear stored credentials.
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted
certificates.
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap Clear credentials to remove all certificates.
To access phone information:
1. From the Home screen, tap
General ➔ About device.
➔ Settings ➔
General
2. The following information displays:
• Software update: allows you to update your phone software, if
available. For more information, refer to “Software Update”
on page 137.
Clear credentials
1. From the Home screen, tap
General ➔ Security.
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial
information, and other phone information such as the model
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version,
and software build number.
General
• Status: displays the Battery status, Battery level (percentage),
Network, Signal strength, Mobile network type, Service state,
Roaming status, Mobile network state, the phone number for
this device (My phone number), IMEI number, IMEISV number,
IP address, Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial
number, Up time, and Device status.
Changing Your Settings
136
• Legal information: This option displays information about
Open source licenses, Google legal information, and Samsung
legal information. This information clearly provides copyright
and distribution legal information and facts as well as Google
Terms of Service, Terms of Service for Android-powered
Phones, and much more pertinent information as a reference.
Read the information and terms, then press
to return to
the Settings menu.
• Device name: displays the phone’s model name.
• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.
• Android version: displays the android version loaded on this
handset.
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on
this handset.
Software Update
The AT&T Software Update feature enables you to use your
phone to connect to the network and upload any new phone
software directly to your phone. The phone automatically
updates with the latest available software when you access
this option.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General
General ➔ About device ➔ Software update.
2. Tap Check for updates.
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this
handset.
3. At the AT&T Software update prompt, tap OK to
continue.
• Build number: displays the software, build number.
4. The phone automatically updates the software (if
available), otherwise, when the Current software is up
to date prompt is displayed, tap OK.
• SELinux status: displays the status of SELinux. SELinux is a
set of security policies/modules which is applied to the device
to improve the overall security.
137
Note: Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used
for updates to the handset or support. For additional
information please contact your AT&T service
representative.
5. When updating software, once the update file is
downloaded, you can delay the update on the start
screen by postponing it for a certain period of time. If
you want to resume the update before the selected
time, tap Continue update.
Changing Your Settings
138
Section 7: Messaging
This section describes how to send and receive different
types of messages. It also includes the features and
functionality associated with messaging.
Types of Messages
Your phone provides the following message types:
• Text Messages
• Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages
• Email and Gmail Messages
• AT&T Messages
• Hangouts
• Google+ and Messenger Messages
• ChatON
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive
text messages to and from other mobile phones or email
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to
your service provider’s message service.
139
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and
audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to
your service provider’s multimedia message service.
Important! When creating a message, adding an image, a
sound file, or a video clip to a text message
changes the message from a text message to a
multimedia message.
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and
indicate when messages are received and their type. For
more information, refer to “Indicator Icons” on page 24.
Creating and Sending Messages
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
Compose.
➔
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Messaging
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access
Messaging from another Home screen, you must tap
Apps
➔ Messaging .
4. Tap the Enter message field and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer
to “Entering Text” on page 72.
5. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field.
6. Review your message and tap Send
.
2. Tap on the Enter recipient field to manually enter a
recipient or tap
to select a recipient from your
Contacts.
Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it will be
automatically saved as a draft.
3. If adding a recipient from your Contacts, tap the
contact to place a checkmark then tap Done.
Messaging Options
The contact will be placed in the recipient field.
Options before composing a message
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
.
Note: For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less
than 10, all members in the group will be added. You will
need to delete any unnecessary members in the list by
selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted
entries.
2. Before composing a message, press
to reveal
additional messaging options:
• Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for
a certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the
Messaging Search window and tap .
Note: Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with
a semicolon (;) then using the previous procedure.
• Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread.
Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will
appear next to the message. Tap Delete.
• Draft messages: displays the draft messages folder and its
contents.
Messaging
140
• Locked messages: displays the locked messages folder and
its contents.
• View contact: allows you to see information on the recipient.
This option only appears if the recipient is in your Contacts list.
• Scheduled messages: displays the scheduled messages
folder and its contents.
• Add slide: allows you to add a new page to a message.
• Spam messages: displays the spam messages folder and its
contents.
• Scheduling: allows you to schedule a time for the current
message to be delivered.
• Settings: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more
information, refer to “Messaging Settings” on page 144.
• Add to spam numbers: allows you to register the number as
spam.
Options while composing a message
1. While composing a message, press
to reveal
additional messaging options.
• Insert smiley: allows you to add emoticons, such as a happy
face to your message.
• Add text: allows you to copy text from your contacts, calendar,
or from a memo to add to your message. This is a convenient
feature for adding names, phone numbers, events, etc. to your
message. For more information, refer to “Adding
Additional Text” on page 142.
• Add to Contacts: allows you to add the recipient to your
Contacts list. This option only appears if the recipient is not
already in your Contacts list.
141
• Add recipients: allows you to add additional recipients.
• Remove from spam numbers: allows you to unregister a
number from the spam number list. This option only appears if
the number was previously registered as spam.
• Discard: allows you to delete the message.
Note: You must be logged into your Samsung account prior to
using the S Translator feature.
• Translate: launches a Translate popup menu. Here you can
both assign the sender’s original language and assign a target
language for the recipient (they will receive your message in the
designated language).Enable the translate feature then
configure the available options as desired. Tap OK to store the
new settings.
Adding attachments to a message
To add an attachment to your message, tap
and select
one of the following options:
• Image: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list
to add it to your message.
• Take a picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take
a photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by
tapping Save.
• Video: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,
then add it to your message.
• Record video: allows you to temporarily exit the message,
record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it
to your message by tapping Save.
• Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the
Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to
the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping Done.
• Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and
record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then
automatically attached to the message.
• S Note: allows you to add an S Note that you have created.
• Calendar: allows you to add an event from your calendar. Select
the desired event and tap Done.
• Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing
your location.
• Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,
then add it to your message by tapping Done.
Adding Additional Text
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and
events from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo.
1. While composing a message, press
➔ Add text.
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:
• S Note: allows you to insert text from an existing S Note.
• Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a
calendar event to your message.
Messaging
142
• Location: allows you to add an address and the link to the
location on Google Maps.
• Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of
any of your contacts to your message.
• Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and
sentences.
The information is added to your message.
Viewing New Received Messages
1. When you receive a new message, the new message
icon will appear at the top of your screen.
2. Open the Notification Panel and select the message.
For more information, refer to “Notification Panel” on
page 42.
– or –
From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
tap the new message to view it.
then
The selected message appears in the display.
3. To play a multimedia message, tap
.
• To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap
143
.
4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages
have been added), touch the screen and in a single
motion, scroll up or down the page.
Message Threads
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped
into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see
all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and
displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed
in the order in which they were received, with the latest
message displayed at the top.
To open a threaded message follow these steps:
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
.
Tap the message thread you want to view.
2. Touch and hold the message thread to display the
following options:
• View contact: displays the contact’s information. This option
only displays if the sender is in your Contacts list.
• Add to Contacts: displays the Contacts information screen.
This option only displays if the sender is not in your Contacts
list.
• Delete: displays a confirmation dialog box that when pressed,
deletes the entire thread.
• Add to spam numbers: allows you to register the number as
spam.
• Remove from spam numbers: allows you to unregister a
number from the spam number list. This option only appears if
the number was previously registered as spam.
Deleting Messages
.
2. Touch and hold a message, then tap Delete.
3. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to
cancel.
Deleting multiple message threads
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
2. Press
.
➔ Delete threads.
3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark
will appear beside each message you select.
4. Tap Delete.
Message Search
You can search through your messages by using the
Message Search feature.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
2. Tap
.
➔ Search.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to
.
search for, then tap
Deleting a single message thread
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
5. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to
cancel.
4. All messages that contain the search string you
entered are displayed.
Messaging Settings
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.
➔
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
➔ Settings.
2. The following message settings are available under
three different tabs:
General Tab:
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is
reached, rather than having them overwritten.
Messaging
144
• Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text
messages can be in one conversation.
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how
many multimedia messages can be in one conversation.
SMS/MMS Tab:
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the
messages that you have stored on your SIM card.
• Text templates: allows you to edit or add new text templates to
use in your messaging.
• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your
Message center where your messages reside while the system
is attempting to deliver them.
• Bubble style: allows you to choose from several bubble styles
for your messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that
surround each message.
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text
messages. Choose between GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or
Automatic.
• Background style: allows you to choose from several
background styles for your messages.
• Group messaging: allows you to send a single message to
multiple recipients.
• Split view: when in Landscape mode, allows you to view both
the message list and the contents of the currently selected
message.
• Auto retrieve: allows the message system to retrieve
messages automatically.
• Use the volume key: allows you to change the text size by
using the up or down volume keys.
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,
Restricted, or Warning.
– Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with
• Add signature: when enabled, this feature allows you to create
a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.
– Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that
• Signature text: allows you to enter a desired signature for your
message.
you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the
Core MM Content Domain.
content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.
– Free: you may add any content to the message.
145
• MMS alert: allows you to receive an alert when MMS mode
becomes active.
More Tab:
• Push messages: allows you to receive push messages from
the network.
• CB activation: allows you to receive Cell Broadcast (CB)
messages.
• Channel configuration: allows you to set up the channel that
you will receive CB messages on.
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your
status bar.
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your
message notifications.
• Vibrate: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated
with message alerts.
• Message alert repetition: allows you to set the interval for new
message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or Every
10 minutes.
• Emergency alerts: allows you to receive wireless emergency
alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS).
For more information, refer to “Emergency Alerts” on page
147.
• Emergency notification preview: allows you to play the
emergency alert tone so you will know what to expect when an
alert is received.
• Alert reminder: allows you to set reminders after you receive
an alert. You can select Once, Every 2 minutes, Every 15
minutes, or Off (default).
• Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure
available spam settings such as:
• Add to spam numbers: allows you to manually enter and
assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source.
• Add to spam phrases: allows you to assign a specific text
phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.
• Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks
incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers.
• Preview message: when enabled, allows you to view a
preview of new message text on the Status bar.
Messaging
146
Emergency Alerts
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) which
may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting
Network (PLAN). If your wireless provider has chosen to
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive
geographically-targeted messages. Alert messages are
provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and
will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within
their area. There is no charge for receiving an Emergency
Alert message.
There are three types of Emergency Alerts:
• Alerts issued by the President
• Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life (Extreme and
Severe)
• AMBER Alerts (missing child alert)
147
Customers may choose not to receive Imminent Threats
(Extreme and Severe) and AMBER Alerts. Alerts issued by the
President can not be disabled. To disable Imminent Threats
and AMBER Alerts, follow the instructions below:
.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
2. Press
➔ Settings ➔ More tab.
3. Scroll to the bottom and tap Emergency alerts.
4. All alerts are enabled by default (checkmark showing).
Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove
the checkmark.
Using Email
Email enables you to review and create email using various
email services. You can also receive text message alerts
when you receive an important email.
Creating an Email Account
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Email
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup
screen displayed.
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.
3. Enter your password in the Password field.
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,
tap Show password to create a checkmark.
6. Tap Manual setup.
5. Tap Next.
8. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain,
User name and Password, then tap Next.
6. At the Account options screen, tap any of the options
you would like.
7. Tap Next.
8. Enter a name for this email account (optional).
9. Tap Done.
Creating a Corporate Email Account
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to
synchronize with a corporate email account.
➔ Email
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup
screen displayed.
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.
3. Enter your password in the Password field.
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,
tap Show password to create a checkmark.
5. If you want all of your emails sent from this email
account by default, tap checkbox to create a
checkmark.
7. Tap the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync field.
9. At the Activation prompt, tap OK.
The Account options screen is displayed.
10. Enter the desired information in the different fields,
then tap Next.
11. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional) and
tap Done.
Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use.
12. Press
➔ Settings to change the account settings.
Creating Additional Email Accounts
To create additional email accounts after setting up your first
account, follow these steps:
➔ Email
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from
the active account.
2. Press
3. Tap
➔ Settings.
Add account to add another email account.
Messaging
148
4. Enter the information required to set up another
account. For more information, refer to “Creating an
Email Account” on page 147.
Switching Between Email Accounts
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Email
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from
the active account.
2. Tap the Inbox button at the top of your screen that
displays the optional name you assigned to your active
email account, for example, Work, Gmail, etc.
Your Email accounts screen is displayed.
3. Tap the Email account you would like to switch to. You
can also select Combined view which will display email
messages from all accounts.
4. The new Email account is displayed.
Using Gmail
Gmail is Google’s web-based email. When you first setup the
phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized
with your Gmail account.
149
Signing into Your Gmail
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to
access Gmail.
1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Gmail
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
The Inbox loads conversations and email.
Creating a Gmail Message
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap
at the bottom of the
screen to create a new message.
2. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.
Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a
comma.
3. Tap
copy.
and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind
4. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.
5. Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your
message.
6. Tap
to send.
Viewing a Gmail Message
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view it.
2. The following options are available after a message
has been selected:
• Archive
: archives the selected message.
• Delete
: deletes the message.
• Mark Unread
: after reading a message, marks as unread.
• Newer: swipe your screen to the right to see newer messages.
• Older: swipe your screen to the left to see older messages.
3. Press
for additional options.
Hangouts
Hangouts is a free Windows and web-based application for
instant messaging offered by Google. You can connect with
your friends across computers and various Android devices.
You can have conversations or video calls with up to 10
friends.
Note: The first time you use Hangouts, you will need to
download the updated application from the Play Store.
When the Play Store page displays, tap Update. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 187.
1. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Hangouts
.
3. The first time you access Hangouts, tap Confirm to
confirm your mobile number. If the number is not
correct, tap Edit Number to change it.
4. Begin using Hangouts.
5. Press
➔ Help for more information on using
Hangouts.
Messaging
150
Google +
Messenger
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your
own private album on Google+.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Google+
.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to
Google+.
– or –
Tap Add account to create another account.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.
5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information.
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into
a simple group conversation. When you get a new
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your
phone. It is now being incorporated into the Hangouts
application.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Messenger
4. The Hangouts screen is displayed. For more
information, refer to “Hangouts” on page 150.
AT&T Messages App
AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail
messages together into a single conversation thread and is
accessible by phone or computer.
➔ Messages
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. The first time you use AT&T Messages, tap Update
AT&T Messages.
151
.
3. At the Update to Hangouts display, tap Go to the app.
3. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
Note: The first time you use the AT&T Messages app, you will
need to download the updated application from the Play
Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap Update
then follow the on-screen instructions. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 187.
4. At the Legal stuff... screen, tap Accept to continue.
5. Tap Call Voicemail to record a personal greeting and set
up your app.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the AT&T
Messages app.
ChatON
Provides a global mobile communication service where you
can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat. Share
things such as pictures, videos, animation messages
(Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location
information.
For more information, visit: https://web.samsungchaton.com.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ ChatON
.
2. At the ChatON display, tap Sign in to sign in to your
Samsung account if you have not already done so. For
more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung
Account” on page 12.
– or –
Tap Skip if you have already signed in to your Samsung
account.
3. Enter your real name and tap
OK.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a buddy and
begin your chat session.
Messaging
152
Section 8: Connections
This section describes the various connections your phone
can make including accessing Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and
Connecting your PC.
Wi-Fi
Connect to a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
About Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to
as wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local
Area Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11
wireless specification to transmit and receive wireless data.
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and
accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can
either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or
Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and
password).
Turning Wi-Fi On
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning
Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover and connect to
compatible in-range WAPs.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
Connections
153
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
.
➔ Settings ➔
Connections
The network names and security settings (Open
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi
networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section.
2. Tap the network you want to connect to.
Note: When you select an open network, you will be
automatically connected to the network.
3. Enter a wireless password if necessary.
Manually add your new network connection
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. Tap Add Wi-Fi network.
➔ Settings ➔
Connections
3. Enter the Network SSID. This is the name of your
Wireless Access Point.
4. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This
must match the current security setting on your target
WAP.
5. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s
password.
6. Tap Show advanced options, if you need to add
advanced options such as Proxy settings, IP settings,
or Key management.
7. Tap Connect to store the new information and connect
to your target WAP.
Note: The next time your device connects to a previously
accessed or secured wireless network, you are not
prompted to enter the WAP key again, unless you reset
your device back to its factory default settings.
Turning Wi-Fi Off
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
➔ Settings ➔
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi OFF
.
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery and
reduce your use times.
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
➔ Settings ➔
Connections
2. Tap Scan.
All available Wi-Fi networks are displayed.
Connections
154
Wi-Fi Status Indicators
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a
glance:
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
• Sort by: allows you to sort by alphabet or RSSI.
Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point
available but you are not connected to it. May also
display if there is a communication issue with the
target Wireless Access Point (WAP).
• Always allow scanning: allows the Google location service
and other apps to scan for networks, even when Wi-Fi is turned
off.
Displays when connected to another device using
Wi-Fi Direct. For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi
Direct” on page 156.
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings
The Advanced Wi-Fi menu allows you to set up many of your
device’s advanced Wi-Fi services.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
Connections
2. Press
➔ Advanced.
The following options are available:
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.
155
• Passpoint: allows you to connect to passpoint-enabled Wi-Fi
Access Points automatically. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on
.
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to
disconnect from Wi-Fi.
• Auto network switch: allows the device to automatically
switch between a Wi-Fi network or a cellular network.
• Auto connect: allows you to be automatically connected to an
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.
• Install certificates: allows you to install security certificates
that you have on a MicroSD card.
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi
Direct.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
➔ Settings ➔
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
.
3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct
button.
4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 on the other device you want to
connect with. The steps on a different model of phone,
may be different.
5. On your phone, tap Scan.
The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices.
6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,
tap on it.
8. Once connected, the other device will show as
Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the
icon will display at the top of your screen.
9. For additional information about Wi-Fi Direct, press
➔ Help.
Sharing Information with Connected Device
To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the
connected device, follow these steps:
1. View the information that you want to share. For
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in
your camera viewer or My Files folder, then tap the
Share, Share via, or Send via option.
2. Tap the Wi-Fi Direct option.
3. Tap the connected device name. For example,
Android_49ba.
4. Tap Done.
5. The file is transferred and the other device will receive
a screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been
received. The file can be found in My Files ➔ All ➔
Device storage in the ShareViaWiFi folder.
7. The other device has 2 minutes to tap Accept for the
connection to be made.
Connections
156
Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and
shared folder information may differ.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi
connections, and track your data use.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ AT&T Smart
Wi-Fi
.
2. The first time you access AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you will
need to install it. Tap OK at the prompt.
3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
done so.
4. The Play Store displays the AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
application. Tap Update.
5.
Tap Accept & download.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Wi-Fi.
For more information on how to use this application, go
to www.att.com/smartwifi.
157
NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when
you touch your device with another compatible device. This
is used for applications such as S Beam and Android Beam.
To activate NFC on your device, see “NFC” on page 93.
Bluetooth
About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and
wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is
usually up to approximately 30 feet.
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
To turn Bluetooth on:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections.
➔ Settings ➔
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON
.
When active,
appears within the Status area.
To turn Bluetooth off:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections.
➔ Settings ➔
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth OFF
.
Bluetooth Status Indicators
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance:
Displays when Bluetooth is active.
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating.
Bluetooth Settings
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of
the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,
including:
• Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth
communication and description
• Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other
Bluetooth devices
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections.
2. Verify your Bluetooth is ON
Connections
.
3. Tap Bluetooth.
To change your Bluetooth name:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
General ➔ About device ➔ Device name.
General
2. Use the keyboard to modify your device name and tap
OK.
To make your device visible:
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press
➔
Visibility timeout.
• Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other
devices for pairing and communication.
2. Select a time that you would like your device visibility
to time-out.
To show received files:
From the Bluetooth settings page, press
Received files.
➔
A list of all files received from Bluetooth is displayed.
Connections
158
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan to search
for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such
as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations
may be different, and functions such as transfer or
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth
compatible devices.
Pairing Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted
connections between your device and another Bluetooth
device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey,
allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the
discovery and authentication process.
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time
process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices
will continue to recognize their partnership and
exchange information without having to re-enter a
passcode again.
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
Disconnecting a paired device
2. Tap Scan. Your device will display a list of discovered
in-range Bluetooth devices.
3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.
4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK.
5. The external device will then have to also accept the
connection and enter your device’s PIN code.
Once successfully paired to an external device,
appears within the Status area.
159
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection
between the device and your phone, but retains the
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the
connection information again.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously
paired device (from the bottom of the page).
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of
your phone or it is powered off.
Deleting a paired device (unpair)
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection
record” and upon reconnection would require that you reenter all the previous pairing information.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap
next to the
previously paired device. This opens the connected
device’s menu options.
3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.
4. Tap Rename to change the name of the paired device.
5. Tap Call audio to enable or disable call audio from the
paired device.
6. Tap Media audio to enable or disable media audio from
the paired device.
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities,
you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or
other items using a Bluetooth connection.
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
3. Press
.
➔ Share namecard via.
4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via
Bluetooth. A green checkmark will appear next to each
entry you select.
5. Tap Done.
6. Tap Bluetooth.
7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to.
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and
communicating for the pairing to be successful.
Connections
160
8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your
notifications list.
PC Connections
You can connect your device to a PC using your PC data
cable using various USB connection modes.
Media device (MTP): allows you to transfer media files in
Windows, or using an Android file transfer on a Mac.
Camera (PTP): allows you to transfer photos using the camera
software, and transfer any files onto a PC that does not
support MTP.
Media device (USB 3.0): allows you to transfer media files in
Windows with USB 3.0, or using an Android file transfer on a
Mac with USB 3.0.
Kies: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You
can also backup precious contacts and calendars, download
apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device
firmware. Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your
devices.
161
Caution! Using USB 3.0 increases the data transfer speed, but
may cause an unstable network connection. If the
USB 3.0 connection mode is not in use for ten
minutes, it will be automatically switched to the USB
2.0 connection mode.
Note: To sync your device to your PC, it is highly
recommended that you install Samsung Kies which is
available at http://www.samsung.com/kies (for Windows/
Mac).
Note: If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have
Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your
computer. Also, ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0
or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your
computer.
Connecting as a Storage Device
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the
device, you can also access the files directory from the
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a
removable disk, separate from the internal memory.
1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the
cable to the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up
window displays on the PC when connected.
2. On the PC pop-up, click Open device to view files.
3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.
Connections
162
Section 9: Applications
This section contains a description of each application that is
available in the Apps Menu, its function, and how to navigate
through that particular application. If the application is
already described in another section of this user manual,
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.
Note: This manual only addresses applications that have been
loaded on your device as of the date of purchase.
Information concerning third party applications that you
may choose to download from the Google Play Store or
otherwise should be obtained from the application
provider directly and not from Samsung.
Application Icons
The Apps menu provides quick access to the items you use
most frequently.
The following table contains a description of each
application. If the application is already described in another
section of this user manual, then a cross reference to that
particular section is provided.
For information on navigating through the Apps icons, see
“Navigating Through the Application Menus” on page 31.
1. From the Home screen, tap
, then tap one of the
application icons.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequentlyused applications to one of the Home screens. For details,
see “Customizing Your Home Screen” on page 37.
163
3. To return to the main Home screen, tap
.
Action Memo
Action Memo allows you to quickly write memos and link
them to actions such as making a call, sending, a message,
or searching the web.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Action Memo
2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to
enter edit mode.
– or –
Tap
(Create) to create a new action memo.
3. Use the on-screen options to create your memo.
4. Tap
(Save) to store the new memo.
The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described
in the following table:
Allows you to add free-format drawing and change the
input color.
Allows you to erase marks and drawings.
Circle an on-screen text or drawing to then assign that
as an action item to an available application such as:
Call, Contacts, Messaging, Email, Internet, Maps
Calendar event.
Displays additional functions.
Detaches the current memo and converts it in a small
popup box.
Reduces the number of on-screen options.
Closes the current session and save the action
memo.
Cancels the current memo.
Saves the current memo and creates a new one.
Add an additional page to the memo.
5. From within the main application screen select the
following functions:
• Search (
): allows you to search for information within
existing memos.
• Create (
): allows you to create a new memo.
• Delete (
): allows you to delete an existing memo.
Allows you to edit the current color.
Applications
164
AT&T Code Scanner
AT&T Code Scanner allows you to scan two-dimensional (QR
and datamatrix codes) and one-dimensional (UPC and EAN)
barcodes found in magazines, stores, and online.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ AT&T Code Scanner
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
AT&T DriveMode
With the AT&T DriveMode application, you can set your
phone to auto reply when you are driving and don’t want to
answer the phone. You can set auto reply to Messages,
Emails, and Phone Calls. You can also allow up to five of your
contacts to contact you while you are in Drive mode.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ AT&T DriveMode
.
The AT&T DriveMode screen is displayed.
3. The first time you use the AT&T Code Scanner, you will
need to download the updated application from the
Play Store. Tap Update AT&T Code Scanner.
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and Privacy Policy and
tap I Accept to continue.
4. When the Play Store page displays, tap Update and
follow the on-screen instructions to download the app.
For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page
187.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your AT&T
DriveMode options.
5. At the License screen, tap Agree to continue or
Disagree to exit.
6. At the Welcome screen, follow the on-screen
instructions to use the AT&T Code Scanner.
7. Press
165
➔ Help for additional information.
3. Read the additional information and tap Continue.
AT&T FamilyMap
AT&T Locker
AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind by being able to
conveniently locate a family member from your wireless
phone or PC and know that your family's location information
is secure and private.
AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your
photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient
place; the AT&T cloud.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ AT&T Locker
Note: To sign up for service, visit http://www.att.com/familymap
for more information.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
➔ AT&T FamilyMap
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
3. The first time you access the AT&T FamilyMap
application, tap Get FamilyMap.
4. From the Play Store, tap UPDATE and follow the onscreen instructions to update the app.
5. At the AT&T FamilyMap webpage, follow the on-screen
instructions to use AT&T FamilyMap.
3. The first time you access AT&T Locker, tap Sign Up to
create an account. After setting up an account, you
only need to tap Log In.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your
account and to use AT&T Locker.
AT&T Navigator
AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPSdriven applications. These programs not only allow you to
achieve turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local
searches.
Important! You must have a data plan to use this feature.
Applications
166
Note: These services may require the purchase of a
subscription.
To launch the AT&T Navigator application, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ AT&T Navigator
.
2. Read the Terms of Service and tap Accept to
acknowledge the terms of use.
3. For security purposes, a code is sent to your device via
text message. Enter the code in the provided field and
tap Continue.
4. Tap an AT&T Navigator plan that you choose. There are
paid and free plans.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T
Navigator.
AT&T Ready2Go
AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your
phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up
email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure WiFi and many more features. For more information, refer to
“Configuring your Phone” on page 12.
167
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi
connections, and track your data use. For more information,
refer to “AT&T Smart Wi-Fi” on page 157.
Calculator
With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division. The Calculator also
keeps a history of recent calculations.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Calculator
2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric
keys.
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the
corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key.
4. Enter the second number.
5. To view the result, tap equals (=).
located at the
6. To view calculator history, tap
top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past
calculations is displayed. Tap
again to display
the calculator keypad.
7. To clear the calculator history, press
history.
➔ Clear
➔ One-handed operation on to set the
8. Press
display so that it is easier to use the calculator with one
➔ One-handed operation off to turn it
hand. Press
off.
9. Turn your phone sideways to the landscape position to
display the scientific calculator.
Calendar
3. Tap
event.
(Create event) to create a new Calendar
4. Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a
blue box.
5. Press
and select one of the following options:
• Go to: displays a specific date.
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today,
or an individual event.
• Search: allows you to search within your current events.
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by
day, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act
as a reminder, if necessary.
• Sync: allows you to synchronize your calendar with one or all of
your accounts. This option only appears when an account has
been opened.
To access the Calendar:
1. From the Home screen, tap
• Calendars: allows you to view the current Calendar accounts.
➔ Calendar
2. The following tabs are located on the right side:
• Year: displays the Year view.
• Month: displays the Month view.
.
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.
6. When in month view, tap
(Handwriting mode) to
activate handwriting mode. This allows you to jot down
freehand notes using your S pen or finger.
• Week: displays the Week view.
• Day: displays the Day view.
• List: displays the List view.
• Task: allows you to search for tasks.
Applications
168
Calendar Settings
1. From any Calendar view, press
➔ Settings.
2. Tap View styles ➔ Month view styles and select an
option.
3. Tap View styles ➔ Week view and select a type:
Timeline or Analog.
4. Tap First day of week and select either Local default,
Saturday, Sunday or Monday.
5. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check
mark indicates selection.
6. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone
from within the Select time zone field.
7. Tap Show week number to display the week numbers
along the side of the week entries.
8. Tap Hide completed tasks to activate this option. A
check mark indicates selection.
9. Tap Weather to activate this option. A check mark
indicates selection.
169
10. Tap Set alerts and notifications to adjust the event
notification method. Choose from: Alert, Status bar
notification, and Off.
11. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar
event notification.
12. Tap Vibration to assign a vibration notification to this
event.
13. Tap Quick responses to edit your default quick
responses for outbound emails. These are default
responses similar to those used by text templates.
Camera
Use your 13.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a
JPEG format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take
videos. For more information, refer to “Pictures and Videos” on
page 74.
ChatON
With the ChatON application, you can interact with friends
and family with text, images, hand-written notes and video
shared instantly. You can chat in groups, while a Web client
will allow the easy sharing of content and conversations
between your phone and PC. For more information, refer to
“ChatON” on page 152.
Chrome
The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google
Chrome web browser on your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Chrome
.
2. Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap
Accept and Continue.
• Time: tap
(Up) or
(Down) to set the new time for the
alarm to sound. Tap AM or PM.
• Alarm repeat: use this option to set the repeating status for the
alarm by tapping one the days that you want the alarm to
sound. Tap the Repeat weekly checkbox to have the alarm
repeat weekly.
3. If you have an existing Chrome account, tap Sign in to
bring your open tabs, bookmarks, and omnibox data
from your computer to your phone, otherwise tap No
thanks.
• Alarm type: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when
activated (Melody, Vibration, or Vibration and melody).
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google
Chrome.
• Alarm volume: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume.
Clock
The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the
World Clock, set a stopwatch, and use a timer.
Alarm
This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific
time.
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Clock
Alarm ➔ Create alarm
. The following options
display:
• Alarm tone: sets the sound file which is played when the alarm
is activated. Select an option or tap Add for additional options.
• Location alarm: when activated, the alarm only sounds when
you are at a specific location. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on
then follow the on-screen
instructions to enter a location.
• Snooze: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30
Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times). Tap the
ON/OFF slider to activate.
Applications
170
• Smart alarm: tracks body movements and calculates the best
time for sounding the alarm. Place the phone somewhere on
your bed then the phone's movement sensor (also known as
accelerometer) is sensitive enough to work from any part of the
bed. Set the Interval and the Tone. Tap the ON/OFF slider to
activate.
• Name: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The
name will appear on the display when the alarm activates.
2. Tap Save to store the alarm details.
Turning Off an Alarm
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and sweep the
icon to the right.
Setting the Snooze Feature
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,
touch and sweep the ZZ icon to the left. Snooze must
first be set in the alarm settings. For more information,
refer to “Alarm” on page 170.
Deleting Alarms
To delete an alarm, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Clock
Alarm ➔
➔ Delete.
➔
2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green
checkmark will appear next to each selection. Tap
Select all to delete all alarms.
3. Tap Delete.
World clock
World clock allows you to view the time of day or night in
other parts of the world. World clock displays time in
hundreds of different cities, within all 24 time zones around
the world.
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Clock
World clock. The clock for your time zone is displayed.
2. Tap Add city to add another city to the World clock.
3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want
to add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to
enter a city to search for.
4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city will
display.
171
5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city,
then tap DST settings.
6. Select Automatic, Off, or 1 hour.
7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol on
the World clock listing will appear.
Deleting a World clock entry
1. From the Home screen, tap
World clock ➔
➔ Delete.
➔ Clock
➔
2. Press and hold a city clock that you wish to delete.
3. At the prompt, tap Delete.
Stopwatch
You can use this option to measure intervals of time.
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Clock
Stopwatch.
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch and tap Lap to mark a
unit of time per lap.
Timer
You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer
to count down to an event based on a preset time length
(hours, minutes, and seconds).
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Clock
➔
Timer.
2. The Minutes field is highlighted and set to 1 minute.
Use the keypad to set the number of minutes you want.
3. Tap the Hours field to set hours if desired. As you tap
different fields, they will become highlighted.
4. Tap the Seconds field to set seconds.
5. Tap Start to begin the timer and tap Stop to pause the
timer.
6. After stopping, tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to
set the timer back to the original setting.
3. Tap Stop to stop the stopwatch.
4. Tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to erase all times
recorded.
Applications
172
Contacts
You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name
and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can
be sorted by name, entry, or group.
You can also synchronize your phone Address Book with
AT&T Address Book, the network backup service.
For more information, refer to “Contacts and Your Address
Book” on page 61.
Device Help
Device Help provides online information to help with your
device questions.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Device Help
The Device Health screen is displayed.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions for accessing helpful
information.
Downloads
The Downloads application allows you to manage all of your
downloads from the Play Store and the Browser.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Downloads
All of your downloads are listed.
2. Tap an available file and select it for use.
173
3. Choose an available action such as Share via, Delete,
Sort by size/date, or Clear list.
Email
Email enables you to review and create email using various
email services. You can also receive message alerts when
you receive an important email. For more information, refer
to “Using Email” on page 147.
Flipboard
This application creates a personalized digital magazine out
of everything being shared with you. Access news stories,
personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your
Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account,
photos from friends and much more.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Flipboard
2. Swipe the screen up and select some on-screen
categories that you are interested in, then follow the
on-screen instructions to build your flipboard.
– or –
Tap Tap to sign in to log into your previously created
profile.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and
share as a picture message. For more information, refer to
“Gallery” on page 82.
Games
Access social and premium games. Join Game Hub to enjoy
free games with your friends.
Games.
1. From a Home screen, touch
➔
2. Tap a game and follow the on-screen instructions.
Gmail
Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured
when you first set up your phone. Depending on your
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically
synchronize with your Gmail account on the web. For more
information, refer to “Using Gmail” on page 149.
Google
The Google Search application is the same on-screen
Internet search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on
your main Home screen. For more information, refer to
“Google Search Bar” on page 28.
Google Settings
As Google has become more intertwined with other
applications, this menu provides a quick and ready access
point to configure preferences for Google+, Maps & Latitude,
Locations, etc. You can also use the Search function to
initiate a Google Search from this menu.
➔
Google
1. From the Home screen, tap
Settings and select an on-screen option.
2. Tap one of the Google Settings options.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to modify your Google
Settings.
Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your
own private album on Google+. For more information, refer
to “Google +” on page 151.
Applications
174
Group Play
Group Play allows you to share pictures, music, and
documents in real-time with your friends. You can create a
group from your device or join other groups.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Group Play
2. The first time you access Group Play, read the
Disclaimer and tap Agree.
The Group Play main screen is displayed.
Creating a group
If you have media you want to share, create a group.
1. From the Group Play main screen, if you want to set a
group password, tap the Set group password checkbox.
2. Tap Create group.
3. If you selected the Set group password checkbox in
step 1, enter a group password at the Set group
password prompt, and tap OK.
Mobile AP is enabled.
4. Tap one of the media items listed under the Share and
play content heading.
5. Tap the items you want to share to create a
checkmark, then tap Done or OK.
175
6. Have your friends sign onto Group Play from their
devices and they can view your media using you as a
Mobile AP.
7. Press
➔ Info for information on the device that is
hosting the Mobile AP.
Joining a group
If you want to see media from your friend’s phone, join a
group.
1. From the Group Play main screen, tap Join group.
2. Your phone scans for available groups for you to join.
3. Tap a group to join.
You will now be able to see your group’s shared media.
4. Press
➔ Info for information on the device that is
hosting the Mobile AP.
Hangouts
Hangouts is a free Windows and web-based application for
instant messaging offered by Google. You can connect with
your friends across computers and various Android devices.
You can have conversations or video calls with up to 10
friends. For more information, refer to “Hangouts” on page
150.
Help
The Help application provides detailed help for using your
phone and the included features and applications.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Help
.
2. Tap one of the following for more information:
• New features: provides help on all of the new features and
applications such as Air command, Scrapbook, S Finder,
S Note, Easy chart, Direct pen input, Multi window, My
Magazine, and Easy clip.
• Basics: provides basic information on using your device.
• Applications: provides information on how to use basic
applications like Contacts, Email, Internet, Camera, Gallery,
S Health, Group Play, WatchON, S Voice, and S Translator.
• Settings: provides information on settings for Wi-Fi, Bluetooth,
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot, Ringtone, Power saving mode, NFC,
Screen Mirroring, and Voice control.
• Online help: provides more detailed online help for additional
questions you may have.
Internet
The Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section
explains how to navigate the Browser and introduces you to
the basic features.
Accessing the Mobile Web
To access the Browser:
.
From the Home screen, tap Internet
The AT&T/YAHOO! mobile homepage displays.
Navigating with the Browser
1. To select an item, tap an entry.
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with
your finger in an up or down motion.
3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across
a web page.
4. To return to a previous page, press
5. To move forward to a web page, press
.
.
Browser Options
From the home page, press
browser options.
to access your
Applications
176
Using the Browser Bar
The Browser Bar enhances your browsing experience by
providing contextual tools and quick access to your favorite
content.
1. Tap
at the bottom of any web page to display the
Browser Bar.
2. Swipe the Browser Bar to the left or right to access
favorite shortcuts and tools.
3. To modify your Browser Bar settings, from any Home
screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ General General ➔
Browser Bar.
Enter a URL
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL.
Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone.
To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these
steps:
1. Tap the URL field at the top of your screen.
2. Enter the URL using the on-screen keypad.
The website displays.
177
Search the Internet
To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these
steps:
1. From the Google homepage, tap the URL field.
2. Enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-screen
keypad and tap Go.
3. Tap a link to view the website.
Adding and Deleting Windows
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.
To add a new window, follow these steps:
1. From your browser, press
➔ New window.
A new browser window is opened.
2. Tap 2 (Windows) to see thumbnails of all open
windows.
3. Tap a window listing to open up that Internet window.
at the top right corner of the web page
4. Tap
thumbnail to delete the window.
Going Incognito
The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites
outside of the normal browsing. Pages viewed in this
incognito window won’t appear within your browser history
or search history, and no traces (such as cookies) are left on
your device.
Note: Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on
your device after you exit the incognito mode.
Using Bookmarks
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to
quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs
(website addresses) of the bookmarked sites are displayed in
the Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can
also view your Most visited websites and view your History.
(Bookmarks).
1. From the Home webpage, tap
The Bookmarks page is displayed.
To add a new incognito window:
1. From your browser window, press
Incognito mode.
and select
2. Press
to display additional options.
Adding Bookmarks
2. At the information prompt, tap OK.
1. From any webpage, tap
3. A new browser window displays.
To exit from the incognito window:
1. From your browser window, tap
3. Tap
next to the incognito listing to delete this
window.
➔
.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the Title.
3. Tap Save.
2
(Windows).
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the
incognito window. The incognito icon
appears in
the upper-left of the new browser window while you
are in this mode.
4. Saved to bookmarks will appear at the bottom of the
page.
Applications
178
Lookout Security
Editing Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark
you want to edit.
2. Tap Edit.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the Title, Address,
and Location.
4. Tap Save.
Deleting Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark
you want to delete.
2. Tap Delete.
3. At the Delete bookmark confirmation window, tap OK.
Browser Settings
Tap Internet
2. Read the on-screen information, then tap Get started.
3. Read the on-screen descriptions and activate those
desired features. Tap Next to progress to the next
screen.
4. Tap New user or Existing user.
To make adjustments in your browser settings:
Lookout Security™ provides mobile device-specific security
features that are coupled with a minimal performance hit.
Lookout Mobile Security provides key security options that
are unique to the mobile market. Along with the antivirus and
anti-malware tech, there's a lost and stolen phone locator
service, an application privacy adviser, and a backup service.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Lookout Security
.
➔
➔ Settings.
5. Create a Lookout account by entering an email address
and account password.
6. Re-enter the password and tap Start Lookout.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.
179
Maps
Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and
satellite maps and local business information, including
locations, contact information, and driving directions. You
can also post public messages about a location and track
your friends.
Important! Before using Google Maps you must have at least
an active data (3G) connection. The Maps
application does not cover every country or city.
Enabling a Location Source
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search
for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To
enable the location source you must enable the wireless
network, or enable the GPS satellites.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Location services.
Connections
Note: Selecting Use GPS satellites allows you to locate places
of interest at the street-level. However, this also requires
a clear view of the sky and uses more battery power.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
• inside a building or between buildings
• in a tunnel or underground passage
• in poor weather
• around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
• in a vehicle with tinted windows
Using Maps
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Maps
.
A map will display with your location in the very center.
2. Press
to display additional options.
2. Tap the Use GPS satellites field. A green checkmark will
display next to the field.
Applications
180
Messages (AT&T)
The AT&T Messages app brings your texts, calls, and
voicemail messages together into a single conversation
thread and is accessible by phone or computer. For more
information, refer to “AT&T Messages App” on page 151.
Messaging
Mobile TV
Mobile TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch
your favorite TV shows using your handset.
Note: This feature requires a paid subscription. See your AT&T
Customer Service Representative for more information.
You can send and receive different types of messages. For
more information, refer to “Messaging” on page 139.
1. Tap
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into
a simple group conversation. When you get a new
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your
phone. For more information, refer to “Messenger” on page
151.
3. The Mobile TV main page displays. Follow the onscreen instructions to watch TV.
Messenger
Mobile Hotspot
This application allows you to share your phones’s mobile
data connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. For
more information, refer to “Tethering & portable hotspot” on
page 88.
181
➔ Mobile TV
.
2. Read the 7 day Trial for Mobile TV screen and tap
Accept & Start Trial to continue or Exit to exit.
Note: Mobile TV will use a large amount of data and you are
responsible for all data charges. It is strongly
recommended that you upgrade to a large data plan in
addition to this purchase.
Music
Volume control and SoundAlive.
The Music Player is an application that can play music files.
The Music Player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+,
eAAC+, MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the
Music Player allows you to navigate through your music
library, play songs, and create playlists (music files bigger
than 300 KB are displayed).
Repeat one: repeats the currently playing song.
Repeat all: replays the current list when the list
ends.
Play All: plays the current song list once.
Shuffle On: the current list of songs are randomly
shuffled for playback.
Playing Music
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Music
.
Shuffle Off: songs play in order and are not
shuffled.
2. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (Songs,
Playlists, Albums, Artists, or Folders) to view the
available music files.
Lists the current playlist songs.
Displays the current song in the player window.
3. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to
begin playback.
Provides access to the SoundAlive feature. Tap
the Volume control icon to access this feature.
4. The following Music Player controls are available:
Pause the song.
Returns the user to the music category screen.
Start the song after being paused.
Assign the current song as a Favorite.
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to
previous song.
Streams the current music file to another device
via Samsung Link.
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to go
to next song.
5. Press
➔ Settings to modify your Music settings.
Applications
182
6. Press
to access additional options.
Making a Song a Phone Ringtone
1. From within the Music application, tap the Songs tab.
2. Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the
on-screen context menu.
3. Tap Set as ➔ Phone ringtone.
4. Choose a starting point for the ringtone to start playing
from. Select either From the beginning or Auto
recommendations (you can allow the application to
choose the best part to start from).
5. Select Done.
Creating a Playlist and Adding Music
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Music
.
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
3. Press
➔ Create playlist.
4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap OK.
5. Tap
Add music.
6. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music
tracks to this playlist then tap Done.
Removing Music from a Playlist
To remove music files from a playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Music
.
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
Note: Additional Set as options include Caller ringtone and
Alarm tone.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.
Using Playlists
5. Tap the checkbox to the left of each track you want to
remove from this playlist, or tap Select all to remove all
the music tracks from this playlist, then tap Remove.
Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media
which can then be grouped into a list for later playback.
These Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music
Player options menu or from within a 3rd party music
application (such as Windows Media Player) and then
downloaded to the handset.
183
4. Press
➔ Remove.
Editing a Playlist
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you
can also rename the playlist.
To edit a playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Music
.
2. Tap Playlists.
3. Press
➔ Edit title.
4. Tap a playlist name to edit.
5. Enter a new name for the playlist then tap OK.
My Files
My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in
one convenient location.
➔ All.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ My Files
2. Tap Device storage to see the contents that is stored on
your phone.
Note: Different folders may appear depending on how your
phone is configured.
3. If you have an external SD card inserted, tap SD
memory card to see the contents of your external SD
card (memory card).
My Magazine
Enjoy all of your available updates in a single place. My
Magazine recommends content, information, and
applications within a single location.
1. From the Home screen, press
.
– or –
From the Home screen, flip up from the bottom of the
screen.
2. Tap Next, read and agree to the Terms of Use, and tap
Start.
Navigating My Magazine
1. Scroll up or down the on-screen pages to view more
content.
2. Swipe left or right to move among the previous or next
page.
3. Tap an available tile to view more details.
Applications
184
Other Options
1. Tap
(Menu) to view available options.
2. Tap
(Options) to select or deselect content
assigned to each page.
3. Tap
(Omnibutton) to make a call, take a picture,
send a message, search, open the internet, or access
your application menu.
4. Tap
for additional options.
myAT&T
The myAT&T application allows you to manage your own
AT&T account. You can review and pay your bill, check
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change
your rate plan.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ myAT&T
The myAT&T page is displayed.
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to
continue.
3. Enter your User ID and Password using the onscreen
keypad, then tap Login.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
185
PEN.UP
This Samsung application allows you to join a an online
community, follow your favorite artists, show off your
artwork, and connect with other artists.
This community brings together anyone that uses the S Pen
to draw, sketch, scribble or paint. Share pictures, comment
on other creations, or just browse through the pages for
something to add to your personal collection.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ PEN.UP
2. From the main screen tap either Sign up or Explore
PEN.UP.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Phone
The Phone application allows you to access the dialer
keypad, call logs, and favorites. For more information, refer
to “Call Functions” on page 49.
Play Books
Play Magazines
With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million
free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the
eBookstore.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Play Books
2. Log on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Play
Books application.
Play Games
This application takes you directly to the Play Store Games
area where you can download games.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Play Games
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so.
3. Select an available on-screen option and follow the
on-screen instructions.
With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your
favorite magazines and have them available to read on your
phone at any time or any place.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Play Magazines
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon
browse the full catalog.
to
4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap Accept.
5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view
Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.
6. Tap a magazine to see more information and
subscribe.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a
magazine.
Applications
186
Play Movies & TV
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of
different movies and television shows. You can watch
instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing
at a later time.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔Play Movies & TV
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so.
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and
viewing movies and TV shows.
4. Press
for additional options.
Play Music
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have
added to your music file as well as any music you copied
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have
copied from your PC.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Play Music
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
187
3. At the Google play screen, tap Add account if you have
not previously used Play Music, and follow the onscreen instructions to create your account and use Play
Music.
Play Store
Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and
games to install on your phone. Play Store also allows you to
provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag
an application that might be incompatible with your phone.
Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account.
For more information, refer to “Using Gmail” on page 149.
.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Play Store
2. Sign in to your Google account.
3. Tap a category to download or purchase games or
applications. You can also download updates to
existing applications.
4. Follow on the on-screen instructions.
Polaris Office 5
®
Polaris Office 5 is a Microsoft Office compatible office suite.
This application provides a central place for managing your
documents online or offline. The application can also open
Adobe PDF (Portable Document Format) files.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Polaris Office 5
.
2. Enter your Email information (if desired) and touch
Register to complete the process.
– or –
Touch Skip to ignore this registration.
The main Polaris Office screen displays.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Polaris Office.
S Health
S Health is a wellness application that allows you to better
manage your health by providing you with relevant
information.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ S Health
2. Read the introduction and tap Start.
3. Read the Use of S Health, Connecting Third Party
Devices and Programs, Information Used, Proprietary
Rights and Licences, and Disclaimer of Warranty.
4. Tap the Agree checkbox.
5. Tap Next.
6. Sign in to your Samsung account if you have not
already done so. For more information, refer to
“Creating a Samsung Account” on page 12.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use S Health.
8. Tap
➔ Help for more detailed information.
Before You Start Exercising
This app can be used to monitor your exercise. While
moderate physical activity, such as brisk walking, is safe for
most people, health experts suggest that you talk with your
doctor before you start an exercise program, particularly if
you have any of the following conditions:
• Heart disease;
• Asthma or lung disease;
• Diabetes, or liver or kidney disease;
• Arthritis.
Applications
188
You should also check with your doctor if you have symptoms
suggestive of heart, lung, or other serious disease, such as:
• Pain or discomfort in your chest, neck, jaw, or arms during
physical activity;
• Dizziness or loss of consciousness;
• Shortness of breath with mild exertion or at rest, or when lying
down or going to bed;
• Ankle swelling, especially at night;
• A heart murmur or a rapid or pronounced heartbeat;
• Muscle pain when walking upstairs or up a hill that goes away
when you rest.
Finally, the American College of Sports Medicine
recommends that you see your doctor before engaging in
vigorous exercise if two or more of the following apply:
• You are a man older than age 45 or a woman older than age 55;
• You have a family history of heart disease before age 55;
• You smoke or quit smoking in the past six months;
• You have not exercised for three months or more;
• You are overweight or obese;
• You have high blood pressure or high cholesterol;
• You have impaired glucose tolerance, also called pre-diabetes.
189
When in Doubt - Check it Out
If you are unsure of your health status, have several health
problems, or are pregnant, you should speak with your
doctor before starting a new exercise program. Working with
your doctor ahead of time is a good way to plan an exercise
program that is right and safe for you. Consider it the first
step on your path to physical fitness.
S Note
Use this application to create notes with productivity tools
that turn handwriting into typed text and correct drawn
shapes, lines, and formulas to make them perfect.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ S Note
.
2. At the S Note Welcome screen, tap Start.
3. Select a cover style and tap Next.
4. Select a template and tap Next.
5. Tap an account if you would like to sync your notes,
otherwise, tap Set later.
6. Tap Start.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use S Note.
8. Tap
➔ Help from the main S Note screen to learn
more about the application, then follow the on-screen
instructions.
S Translator
With the S Translator you can easily translate words and
phrases into many different languages.
1. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not
already done so. For more information, refer to
“Creating a Samsung Account” on page 12.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ S Translator
8. Press
.
4. At the S Translator screen, tap the top language bar
and enter your language.
5. Tap the language bar at the bottom of the screen to
select the language that you would like to translate to.
.
It will be translated into the language of the upper box.
– or –
Enter text into the lower box and tap
.
7. Tap either of the Speak buttons at the bottom of the
screen to translate using either language by using your
voice. The translation will appear automatically in the
appropriate box.
for additional options.
S Voice
3. The first time you use S Translator, tap Install the install
the application.
6. Enter text into the upper box and tap
It will be translated into the language of the lower box.
With the S Voice application you can use your voice to
perform operations that you would normally have to do by
hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,
playing music, etc.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ S Voice
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap Confirm to
continue.
3. Read the Terms of Service then tap Agree to continue.
4. Read the information on the About S Voice screen, then
tap Next.
5. Read the information on the Say what you want screen,
then tap Next.
6. Read the information on the Wake up S Voice screen,
then tap Next.
Applications
190
7. Read the information on the Edit what you said screen,
then tap Next.
8. Read the information on the Help screen, then tap
Finish.
9. At the S Voice screen, say “Hi Galaxy” to wake up
S voice.
10. Speak into the phone and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Samsung Apps
With Samsung Apps, you can download hundreds of
applications from a variety of categories.
1. Sign on to your Samsung account if you have not
already done so.
2. From the Home screen, tap
.
➔ Samsung Apps
3. Tap an application that you would like, then follow the
on-screen instructions to download.
4. Press
➔ Help for additional information.
Samsung Hub
Samsung Hub makes it easy to find, sample, and purchase
movies, TV shows, books, games, and music, in one userfriendly location. You can rent or purchase your favorite
content and watch from any location. Samsung Hub is your
gateway to mobile entertainment.
Note: Samsung Hub usage is based on service availability.
Important! You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G/LTE
connection to preview and download a media file.
The internal memory acts as a storage location for
your downloaded rental or purchase.
Creating a New Samsung Hub Account
Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an
account. Enter the required information.
1. Log in to your Samsung account if you have not already
done so.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Samsung Hub
.
3. When prompted to connect via mobile networks, select
either Cancel or Connect.
191
4. If notified your Samsung account is not yet active or
verified, tap OK. You must be signed in to your
Samsung account to use the application’s various
features.
5. Press
➔ Help for additional information.
Using Samsung Hub
The main Samsung Hub screen provides an overview of all
the available categories on one page such as: Music, Video,
Books, and Games. The overview page also displays recently
added media that you can rent or purchase.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Samsung Hub
• The Overview screen (landing page) displays an main access
for all available categories and recently available content for
purchase or rental.
2. Scroll across the screen to select from the following
available pages:
• MUSIC: displays featured Music content available for purchase/
stream from the Music store & Radio. This page also allows you
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Music
store page by clicking on the Music link at the top of the page.
• VIDEO: displays featured film and TV content available for
purchase/rent from the video store. This page also allows you
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Movie &
TV store page by clicking the Video link at the top of the page.
• BOOKS: displays featured Book content available for purchase
from the Book store. This page also allows you to search for
new content, or navigate directly to the Book store page by
clicking the Books link at the top of the page.
• GAMES: displays featured Game content available from the
Game store. This page also allows you to search for new
content, or navigate directly to the Game store page by clicking
the Games link a the top of the page.
• LEARNING: displays featured educational content from the
Learning store.
3. The first time you access Samsung Hub, after you
make a selection, you will need to install the categories
that you want. Tap the categories to make a
checkmark then tap Install.
4. To purchase or view featured content in more detail,
tap on any content (Thumbnail or text) to navigate to
the product detail page.
Applications
192
5. Depending on the content, you can either purchase,
rent, or stream the content directly from the product
detail page.
6. Choose a payment method, then follow the on-screen
instructions.
Samsung Hub Notices
• Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after
you create an account in Samsung Hub.
• Media Content that is purchased and downloaded may be viewed
concurrently on up to five (5) devices with Samsung Hub (or “the
service”) that are also registered to the same account.
• You may remove a device from your account no more than once
every 90 days.
• You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as
you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media
Content later subject to content re-download availability and
content provider permissions.
• You may need network coverage to access Media Content you
have acquired through the Service.
• You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity to download Media
Content.
193
• Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be
viewable on only 1 device in your account at a time.
• Media Content is downloaded and saved to your authorized
device's SD card. No SD Card included out of box.
• Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks
where there is a weak signal.
• You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the
Media Content has been buffered.
• You must finish watching Media Content within the time limit set
out for each piece of content (which may be as short as 24
consecutive hours).
• Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not
extend the available viewing time.
• In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).
• Unless otherwise restricted by the Content Providers, you can
download Media Content to your TV using HDMI connections;
otherwise, you cannot play Media Content downloaded from your
mobile device output.
Samsung Link
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung
mobile phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps
tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real-time,
on-screen monitoring. Samsung’s Samsung Link makes
staying connected easy.
Allows users to share their in-device media content with
other external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living
Network Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also
be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs
via a digital multimedia streamer.
AllShare/Samsung Link Definitions:
Samsung Link/
This new feature builds on the
AllShare Play
previous AllShare Play functionality. It
includes features such as Web storage
integration and social networking
integration. This is a Web service
that requires using a Samsung account.
Applications
194
Group Play
A subset feature of Samsung Link, this
allows you to mirror photos and
multimedia presentations with other
members of your current Wi-Fi
group. Users must be on the same
Wi-Fi and provide an access code to
join the group.
1. Log in to your Samsung account if you have not already
done so.
2. From the Home screen, tap
.
➔ Samsung Link
3. If prompted with an on-screen notification about no
Wi-Fi detected, tap Cancel (to continue by using your
network connection) or Connect to continue.
4. Tap Sign in.
Important! You must first connect both of your communicating
devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an
active/registered Samsung account prior to using
this application.
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Settings” on
page 86.
For more information, refer to “Creating a
Samsung Account” on page 12.
Important! The Samsung account manages the access
information (username/password) to several
applications, such as Samsung Link.
195
5. If prompted to log into your Samsung account, tap Sign
in and follow the on-screen instructions.
Note: If the main screen still shows a Sign in box, close the
application and restart it.
6. Follow the on-screen prompts.
7. From the main screen the following headings are
displayed:
• Registered devices allows you to stream/share selected
multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device
connected to the same Wireless Access Point.
• Registered storage: allows you to receive and playback media
stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by
allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming
content.
Configuring Samsung Link Settings
The Samsung Link™ application must first be configured
prior to its initial use. You must setup parameters such as
connected Wi-Fi, Items to share, source server address, and
external device acceptance rights.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
➔ Samsung Link
2. Press
and then tap Settings and configure the
following settings as desired:
• Registered storage: allows you to add a Web storage location.
Without a storage service/location added, you will not be able
to use Samsung Link.
• Auto upload: allows you to enable automatic upload of images
from your device to those storage locations specified within the
Web storage list. Move the slider to the on position to activate
the feature.
• Video optimization: allows you to setup the video quality for
streamed video content. Move the slider to the on position to
activate the feature.
• Password lock: allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link
by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated
Samsung account password. Move the slider to the on position
to activate the feature.
• My account: displays Samsung account information.
• About this service: displays application information.
• Save to: allows you to save your media to your internal phone
memory or to an SD card.
Applications
196
Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target
Device
Important! Make sure all communicating devices are
connected to the same Wi-Fi.
1. Launch AllShare Play/Samsung Link on the target
device (such as an Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc.).
2. From the Home screen, tap
.
➔ Samsung Link
Note: You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before
you can use this feature.
3. Select your device name from the Registered devices
area.
4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Video,
or Document) and select a file.
• A file with
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely
on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your
device to access the file currently stored on your services’
servers.
197
5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to
place a green check mark alongside it.
6. Tap
(Stream to connected devices) and select an
available target device to begin streaming.
7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the
on-screen Allow button to continue.
Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share
media with the external source.
Confirm
(Samsung Link Controller enabled) appears in
the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate you
are using your device as the media source.
Scrapbook
This application allows you to combine documents, images,
and music into a digital scrapbook.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Scrapbook
2. Tap Start and follow the on-screen tutorials.
3. Press
➔ Help for additional information.
For more information, refer to “S Pen - Using
Scrapbooker” on page 20.
Settings
This widget navigates to the sound and phone settings for
your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,
memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.
For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 85.
SketchBook for Galaxy
This application allows you to explore your imagination
through sketches using the SketchBook for Galaxy
application and S Pen.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ SketchBook for
.
Galaxy
2. The first time you use SketchBook for Galaxy, you must
install it. At the prompt, tap OK.
3. Tap Install.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up SketchBook
for Galaxy and to get started.
Story Album
With Story Album, you can create a digital Album of your
story in media. Special moments will be on a timeline, and if
you wish, you can have your album published as a hard copy.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Story Album
2. The first time you access Story Album you will need to
install the application. Read the introductory
information and tap OK.
3. Tap Install.
4. At the Story Album Welcome screen, tap Start to begin
your Story Album.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
6. Press
➔ Help for additional information.
TripAdvisor
With the TripAdvisor, you can plan and have your perfect trip.
With over 75 million reviews and opinions by travelers, it is
easy to find the best hotels, restaurants, and fun things to do.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ TripAdvisor
2. The first time you access TripAdvisor you will need to
install the application. Read the introductory
information and tap OK.
Applications
198
4. The following video controls are available:
3. Tap Install.
4. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not
already done so.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to use TripAdvisor.
6. Press
for additional options.
Usage Manager
This app is a shortcut to your Data usage settings so you can
manage your data.
Tap
➔ Usage Manager
.
For more information, refer to “Data Usage” on page
89.
Video
The Video Player application plays video files stored on your
microSD card.
.
1. Tap
➔ Video
Pause the video.
Start the video after being paused.
Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to
go to previous video.
Press and hold to fast-forward the video.
Tap to go to next video.
Volume control.
PIP (Picture In Picture) view. The video will
be played in a small window so you can use
your phone for other purposes while watching
the video. Double-tap screen to return to
previous size.
Original size view. The video will be played in
its original size.
2. All videos that you have on your phone and memory
card will be displayed. Tap the video that you want to
play.
Full-screen in ratio view. The video is
enlarged as much as possible without
becoming distorted.
3. The video will begin to play.
Keep aspect ratio view.
199
Full-screen view. The entire screen is used,
which may cause some minor distortion.
Allows you to select another device to
stream the video to using Samsung Link.
Note: The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon
that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the
icon is tapped.
For more information on downloading videos for your phone,
see “Samsung Hub” on page 191.
Voice Recorder
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to
one minute long and then immediately share it using
AllShare Play, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording
time will vary based on the available memory within the
phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Voice Recorder
.
2. To start recording, tap Record
microphone.
and speak into the
3. During the recording process you can either tap Stop
to stop and save the recording or Pause
to
temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap
Record
to resume recording. Once the audio
recording has stopped, the message is automatically
saved. Tap Cancel
to cancel the recording
without saving.
4. Tap Bookmark
to bookmark the current recording.
5. Tap List
to display a list of all your voice
recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it.
to adjust the recording
6. Tap Recording quality
quality. Choose from: Normal, Interview, Conversation,
or Voice memo.
7. For additional options, press
.
Voice Search
The Google Voice Search application allows you to search the
web using only your voice.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Voice Search
2.
When the Google Voice Search screen displays, speak
the word or words that you would like to search for on
the internet.
Applications
200
3. If the timer expires and the mic icon changes from red
to gray, tap the mic icon and speak the word or words
that you would like to search for on the internet.
Results are displayed on your phone.
4. The following options are available at the bottom of
your screen:
• Web: After selecting a different option, tap Web to return to the
original search results.
• Images: Displays images for your search.
• News: Displays news items related to your search.
• More: After tapping More, sweep your screen to the left to see
additional options such as Shopping, Videos, Blogs,
Discussions, Books, and Applications.
• Phone: Displays a phone number if applicable.
WatchON
Important! Before initiating use, verify you have an active
Internet connection available (either mobile
network or Wi-Fi connection).
Note: Before beginning your initial WatchON application setup,
confirm your TV is turned off.
For more information, refer to www.samsungwatchon.com.
Initial Configuration
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ WatchON
Note: If you are not connected to an active Wi-Fi, you may be
prompted to continue the set up process via a mobile
network. Click Connect to proceed.
3. Select your desired country or region for your TV
Guide’s source listing.
201
.
4. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and
set top box.
5. From the Find your TV service screen, select a service
provider from the available channel listing.
6. From the Personalize screen, you can either follow the
on-screen prompts to personalize your desired content
or tap Skip to continue without customizing your
content.
7. Read the on-screen Peel Disclaimer agreement and tap
Agree to complete the set up process.
Customizing Your Remote
1. From the top of the main screen, tap
Control) ➔ Set Up Now.
(Remote
2. From the Select your TV brand screen, tap your TV’s
manufacturer name.
• If you have a brand of TV not listed or you are using a projector,
select from one of the following two options. Choose from
either Show other brands or I have a home projector.
3. Aim your device at the TV and tap
(Power) to
confirm the set up process completed successfully and
the correct TV IR codes were selected.
Note: The process of the initial TV activation can take up to 10
seconds. Please do not press the button again.
4. If the TV turned on, tap Yes, this code 1 works.
– or –
If the TV did not turn on after tapping
(Power) and
waiting 10 seconds, tap No, test next code 2 or
Send this code 1 again.
5. From the Select your channel source screen, select the
entry that corresponds to your current channel control
method:
• Set-top Box: selected when changing channels is done via a
receiver box. Channels are not changed via the TV remote but
rather through the receiver/box.
• My xxx TV: selected when a signal is fed directly into the TV
and no box is used. Channels are changed directly on the TV by
using the TV remote and not a box’s remote.
Applications
202
Note: Try matching your current channel selection method.
6. Select the Satellite Box Brand from the available list.
For example, DirectTV®.
• If your brand does not appear in the list, tap Show other
brands and follow the on-screen instructions.
Important! You must configure your set top box for IR
communication with your device. If you do not
select More info below and follow the on-screen
instructions you may not be able to properly use
the application.
7. When prompted to Enable IR, tap More info to learn
how to configure your set top box to receive and
respond to IR controls.
8. Only after completing the IR setup process and
programming your box, press
.
Note: This IR programming of your set top box is a one-time
process and once successful should not need to be
repeated.
203
9. If prompted to personalize your experience, follow the
on-screen instructions.
Using WatchON
To change channels:
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ WatchON
.
3. From the top of the main screen, tap
(Remote
Control). This launches an on-screen remote control.
• Easy remote: provides the most common used control
features. Scroll down to view additional functions.
4. In a single motion touch and drag up from the bottomright of the screen to access additional remote tabs
Choose from one of the following:
• TV: provides access to control functions specific to your TV.
• [Set top box]: displays customized control specific to your
configured set top box. Ex: satellite dish remote control
functions.
5. From the remote screen press
and then
tap
(Change room) to choose from different
receivers/boxes in different rooms. Ex: Living Room
box, Bedroom box, etc.
6. Press
(Back) to return to the main menu.
Locating your favorite programming:
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap
(Combined
View) to reveal available media categories.
3. Select an available category.
– or –
Tap Channel Guide to display on your TV an on-screen
listing of available set top box shows.
For additional information on the WatchON application,
press
and then select Help.
WatchOn Settings
From the main WatchON screen, press
and then
select an available on-screen option:
• Change room: allows you to select a previously configured
room.
• Edit channels: allows you to add or remove channels from
your custom list. Press and hold a channel number to update
the channel entry.
• About: displays on-screen information about the application.
• Help: displays on-screen help information.
Personalize WatchON
You can personalize your application to do things such as
show content only from your selected media categories, or
add an additional room’s set top box.
To configure your Just for you settings:
The Just for you option displays available content matching
your activated media categories. These categories can be
configured during your initial set up or at any later time.
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap
View) ➔ Just for you.
3. From the On TV tab, press
Settings.
(Combined
and then select
4. Access parameters such as Basic info, Genres and
Sports to then configure and enable those parameters
you would like to show in the Just for you tab.
• Settings: provides access to the Samsung WatchON settings
menu.
Applications
204
To add a new room:
Your device can be used to control boxes/receivers from
several rooms. You could go from controlling your set top box
in your living room and then move into your bedroom to do
the same.
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap the On TV tab
3. Press
and then select Settings ➔ Add room.
4. Name the new room and tap Next.
5. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and
set top box.
Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended
that you upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional
data charges.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ YouTube
.
to search for specific videos,
2. Tap the search field
scroll down to browse through the main page
thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional
options.
3. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or
tap the title link.
4. Press
for additional options.
Follow the steps from page 201 to complete the process.
YouTube
YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can
upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide
variety of user-generated video content, including movie
clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content
such as video blogging, informational shorts and other
original videos.
205
Note: It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view
content. However, if you wish to sign in to access
additional options, tap Sign in at the top left corner, enter
your YouTube or Google username and password, and
tap Sign in.
YPmobile
The Yellowpages Mobile application provides quick and ready
access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your
favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local
businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your
search in real-time.
Note: The first time you use YP, you will need to download the
updated application from the Play Store. When the Play
Store page displays, tap Update or Install then follow the
onscreen instructions. For more information, refer to
“Play Store” on page 187.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ YPmobile
6. Enter information in the What: and Near: fields and tap
Search.
7. Results will be displayed.
8. Tap
map.
to see the locations marked with pins on the
9. Pinch the map screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it
outwards to zoom in.
10. Tap a pin to read information about the location.
11. Tap
to display additional options.
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
3. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap
Accept to continue.
4. Your location is found using GPS. Tap OK to allow
YPmobile to use your current location.
5. Tap the Find a business nearby! field.
Applications
206
Section 10: Health and Safety Information
This device is capable of operating in Wi-Fi™ mode in the
2.4 and 5 GHz bands. The FCC requires that devices
operating within 5.15-5.25 GHz may only be used indoors,
not outside, in order to avoid interference with Mobile
Satellite Services (MSS). Therefore, this device is restricted
from being used outdoors when operating in frequencies
between 5.15-5.25 GHz.
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with
using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”
are used in this section to refer to your phone. Read this
information before using your mobile device.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication
includes the following information:
207
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health
problems.
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some
researchers have reported biological changes associated
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.
The majority of studies published have failed to show an
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell
phone and health problems.
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health
effects.
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not
be confused with the effects from other types of
electromagnetic energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the
genetic material.
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic
radiation with relatively low frequencies.
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection
between RF and certain health problems?
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies
that have shown a connection have failed.
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community
has supported additional research to address gaps in
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.
Interphone Study
Interphone is a large international study designed to
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a
Health and Safety Information
208
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions
being drawn from this data. Additional information about
Interphone can be found at
http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf.
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA
continues to monitor developments in this field.
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users
(COSMOS)
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the
COSMOS study can be found at
http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html.
209
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence
(MOBI-KIDS)
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy
from communication technologies including cell phones and
brain cancer in young people. This is an international
multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be
found at
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
view.php?ID=39.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)
Program of the National Cancer Institute
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about
SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/.
Cell Phone Industry Actions
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry
to take a number of steps, including the following:
• Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;
• Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to
the user; and
• Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to
assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect
the public.
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.
• Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
your head and the cell phone.
Hands-Free Kits
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets
and various types of body-worn accessories such as
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance
requirements when used against the head and against the
body.
Health and Safety Information
210
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head
from RF Radiation
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
accessories which claim to shield the head from those
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory
attached to the phone.
Studies have shown that these products generally do not
work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called
“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone.
The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,
leading to an increase in RF absorption.
211
Children and Cell Phones
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure
apply to children and teenagers as well.
• Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
the head and the cell phone.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from
various sources can be obtained from the following
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):
• FCC RF Safety Program:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.
• Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)
• National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.
• World Health Organization (WHO):
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.
• International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
http://www.icnirp.de.
• Health Protection Agency:
http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.
• US Food and Drug Administration:
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
Certification Information
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure
limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF
energy.
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile
phones employs a unit of measurement known as the
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
Health and Safety Information
212
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety
to give additional protection to the public and to account for
any variations in measurements.
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified
power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.
This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple
power levels so as to use only the power required to reach
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base
station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,
it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not
exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each
model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at
the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For
body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory
that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.
213
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an
Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC
RF exposure guidelines. This mobile phone has an FCC ID
number: A3LSMN900A [Model Number: SM-N900A] and the
specific SAR levels for this mobile phone can be found at the
following FCC website: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/.
The SAR information for this device can also be found on
Samsung’s website: http://www.samsung.com/sar.
SAR information on this and other model phones can be
accessed online on the FCC's website through http://
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the
case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have
the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the
instructions on the website and it should provide values for
typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional
SAR information can also be obtained at
http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sarcellular-telephones.
FCC Part 15 Information to User
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS)
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS";
which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting
Network ("PLAN")). If your wireless provider has chosen to
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
Smart Practices While Driving
On the Road - Off the Phone
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe
operation of his or her vehicle.
Health and Safety Information
214
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,
drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their
primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand
and address distractions.
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use
may be permitted in certain areas.
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the
call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.
Remember, driving comes first, not the call!
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these
tips:
• Use a hands-free device;
• Secure your phone within easy reach;
• Place calls when you are not moving;
• Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
• Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
• Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are
driving and will suspend the call if necessary;
• Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in
an automobile:
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.
215
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video
games while operating a vehicle.
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org.
Battery Use and Safety
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or
damage. Most battery issues arise from improper
handling of batteries and, particularly, from the
continued use of damaged batteries.
• Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise
attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high
degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an
internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.
• Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.
Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate
normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety
hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked
by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear
to be working properly.
• Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in
high temperatures.
• Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone
or the battery may explode when overheated.
• Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For
safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized
service center.
Health and Safety Information
216
• Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the
battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause
damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the
phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.
• Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.
• Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,
jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for
example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.
Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the
object causing the short-circuiting.
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and
recharge your battery only with
Samsung-approved chargers which are
specifically designed for your phone.
217
WARNING!
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard.
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or
chargers.
• Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers.
Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with
reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling
incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.
Consumers should purchase manufacturer or
carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about
whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact
the manufacturer of the battery or charger.
• Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and
charging devices could result in damage to the equipment
and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to
serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious
hazard.
Samsung Mobile Products and
Recycling
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine
Samsung accessories.
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and
accessories may not be available in your area.
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung
mobile device by working with respected take-back
companies in every state in the country.
Drop It Off
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device
and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous
Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these
locations may be found at:
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted
at these locations for no fee.
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations
where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional
information regarding specific locations may be found at:
http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/
index.htm or at http://www.call2recycle.org/.
Mail It In
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label.
Just go to
http://fun.samsungmobileusa.com/recycling/index.jsp.
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved
recycler.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect
Or call, (877) 278-0799.
http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp
.
Health and Safety Information
218
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile
devices and batteries
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance
with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these
items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help
us protect the environment - recycle!
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may
explode.
UL Certified Travel Charger
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety
instructions per UL guidelines:
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
219
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE
POWER OUTLET.
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.
Display / Touch-Screen
Please note the following information when using your
mobile device:
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause
injury to you.
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For
more information, please refer to the “Standard
Limited Warranty”.
GPS
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS
uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are
subject to changes implemented in accordance with the
Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio
navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance
of location-based technology on your mobile device.
Even with GPS, when you make an emergency call:
• Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of
your ability; and
• Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency
responder instructs you.
Navigation
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over
time. In some areas, complete information may not be
available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see
before following them. All users should pay attention to road
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.
Emergency Calls
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well
as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee
connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless
mobile device for essential communications (medical
emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or
underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of
contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to
Health and Safety Information
220
make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal
strength.
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile
device networks or when certain network services and/or
mobile device features are in use. Check with local service
providers.
To make an emergency call:
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.
2. From the Home screen, tap
. The dialer is
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).
Emergency numbers vary by location.
key.
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you
may first need to deactivate those features before you can
make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your
local cellular service provider. When making an emergency
call, remember to give all the necessary information as
accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device
221
Care and Maintenance
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many
years:
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind
displayed.
4. Tap the
may be the only means of communication at the scene of an
accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do
so.
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic
circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not
accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or
dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and
could cause a fire or explosion.
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the
mobile device.
Extreme heat or cold
Responsible Listening
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /
113°F.
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss.
Microwaves
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.
Dust and dirt
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
Cleaning solutions
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water
solution.
Shock or vibration
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough
handling can break internal circuit boards.
Paint
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent
proper operation.
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as
sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged
exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific
research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as
portable music players and cell phones, at high volume
settings for long durations may lead to permanent
noise-induced hearing loss.
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets,
earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices).
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones
Health and Safety Information
222
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of
sound, settings, and equipment.
• Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less
You should follow some common sense recommendations
when using any portable audio device:
• Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into
an audio source.
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound
normal.
• Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest
volume at which you can hear adequately.
• Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your
hearing.
time is required before you hearing could be affected.
• Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,
• Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
• When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to
you can hear what you are listening to.
• Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.
223
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Email: info@audiology.org
Internet:
http://www.audiology.org/Pages/
default.aspx
National Institute on Deafness and Other
Communication Disorders
National Institutes of Health
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov
Internet:
http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH)
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
Washington, DC 20201
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH
(1-800-356-4674)
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov
Internet:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/
default.html
1-888-232-6348 TTY
Operating Environment
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic
Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to
discuss alternatives.
Health and Safety Information
224
Implantable Medical Devices
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential
interference with the device.
Persons who have such devices:
• Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is
turned ON;
• Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
• Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to
minimize the potential for interference;
• Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;
• Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical
device, consult your health care provider.
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rffaqs.html#.
225
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your
mobile device off in health care facilities when any
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
Vehicles
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that
has been added to your vehicle.
Posted Facilities
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted
notices require you to do so.
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling
point (service station).
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off
your vehicle engine.
When your Device is Wet
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it
to a service center.
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices
to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive
hearing devices.
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices
(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile
devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining
noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others
to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the
amount of interference they generate.
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating
system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device
users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their
hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.
Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or
a label located on the box.
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending
on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing
device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not
Health and Safety Information
226
be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out
the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to
evaluate it for your personal needs.
hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless
mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two
values equals M5.
M-Ratings: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet
FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference
to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled.
M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to
enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not
operate in telecoil mode.
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user
with normal use while using the hearing aid with the
particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would
indicate excellent performance.
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be
satisfied. T ratings work similarly.
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4
is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to
enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in
telecoil mode.
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you
find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device
is relatively immune to interference noise.
Under the current industry standard, American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and
wireless mobile device rating values are added together to
indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a
227
M3
+
M2
=
5
T3
+
T2
=
5
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19
standard.
HAC for Newer Technologies
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing
aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies
used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with
hearing aids.
It is important to try the different features of this phone
thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid
or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering
noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of
this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you
have questions about return or exchange policies, consult
your service provider or phone retailer.
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,
damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your
mobile device bill.
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out
of the reach of small children.
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can
require you to stop using the mobile device if such
interference cannot be eliminated.
Cautions
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not
expressly approved by Samsung could void your warranty for
this equipment and void your authority to operate this
equipment. Only use approved batteries, antennas, and
chargers. The use of any unauthorized accessories may be
dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said
accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device.
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping,
hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
Health and Safety Information
228
Other Important Safety Information
• Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or
install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service
may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to
the device.
• Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in
your vehicle are securely mounted.
• Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
• When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static
electricity before inserting the headset.
• Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its
parts, or accessories.
229
• For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could
result.
• Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on
an aircraft.
• Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension
or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or
both.
• While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.
• Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device
immediately.
• Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.
• If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]
Health and Safety Information
230
Section 11: Warranty Information
Standard Limited Warranty
What is covered and for how long?
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and
accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material
and workmanship under normal use and service for the
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following
specified period of time after that date:
Phone
1 Year
Batteries
1 Year
Case/Pouch/Holster
90 Days
Other Phone Accessories 1 Year
What is not covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the
Product.
231
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for
which it is specified.
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new
parts or components when repairing any Product, or may
replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new
Product.
Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be
warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/
replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the
remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original
Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All
replaced Products, parts, components, boards and
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.
What must you do to obtain warranty service?
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must
return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in
an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the
sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product
and the seller’s name and address.
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor
charges for the repair or return of such Product.
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of
the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for
warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be
deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.
Warranty Information
232
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO
THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT
SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR
DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE
233
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER
OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT.
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited
Warranty.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with
a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall
be conducted according to the American Arbitration
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited
Warranty.
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no
more than half of the total administrative, facility and
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or
performance.
Warranty Information
234
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to
optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: “Arbitration
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.
235
Severability
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited
Warranty.
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the
Samsung Customer Care Center for details.
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in
order to provide this service at no charge. If the
warranty has expired on the device, charges may
apply.
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to
change without notice. [111611]
End User License Agreement for
Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") for software, owned by
Samsung and its affiliated companies and its third party
suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which
includes computer software and may include associated
media, printed materials, "online" or electronic
documentation in connection with your use of this device
("Software").
This device requires the use of preloaded software in its
normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED
SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU
DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR
THE SOFTWARE.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions
of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run
one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other
permanent storage media of one computer and use the
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,
and you may not make the Software available over a network
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same
time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine
readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the
backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary
notices contained on the original.
Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source
licenses. The open source license provisions may override
some of the terms of this EULA. We make the applicable
open source licenses available to you on the Legal Notices
section of the Settings menu of your device.
Warranty Information
236
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting
services with the Software.
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered
as part of the product support services related to the
Software provided to you, if any, such as IMEI(your device's
unique identification number), device number, model name,
customer code, access recording, your device's current SW
version, MCC (Mobile Country Code), MNC (Mobile Network
Code). Samsung and its affiliates may use this information
solely to improve their products or to provide customized
237
services or technologies to you and will not disclose this
information in a form that personally identifies you. At all
times your information will be treated in accordance with
Samsung's Privacy Policy, which can be viewed at:
http://account.samsung.com/membership/pp.
5. SOFTWARE UPDATES. Samsung may provide to you or
make available to you updates, upgrades, supplements and
add-on components (if any) of the Software related to
security, including bug fixes, service upgrades (parts or
whole), products or devices, and updates and enhancements
to any software for security previously installed (including
entirely new versions), (collectively “Update”) after the date
you obtain your initial copy of the Software related to security
to improve such Software and ultimately enhance your user
experience with your device. This EULA applies to all and any
component of the Update that Samsung may provide to you
or make available to you after the date you obtain your initial
copy of the Software related to security, unless we provide
other terms along with such Update. To use Software related
to security provided through Update, you must first be
licensed for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible
for the Update. After the Update, you may no longer use the
Software that formed the basis for your Update eligibility. The
updated Software version may add new functions and, in
some limited cases, may delete existing functions.
While the Update will be generally available, in some limited
circumstances, the Software updates will only be offered by
your network carrier, and such Software updates will be
governed by your contractual relationship with your network
carrier.
With the “Automatic Update” function enabled (as in the
default setting in the Security menu in the Setting), your
device downloads some Updates automatically from time to
time. Given the importance of receiving Updates for security
software in a timely manner to defend against new threats,
such Update may be automatically downloaded and installed.
We recommend that you check availability of any new
Updates periodically for optimal use of your device. If you
want to avoid any use of network data for the Update
downloads, then you should choose the “Wi-Fi Only” option
in the Setting.
6. Some features of the Software may require your device to
have access to the internet and may be subject to
restrictions imposed by your network or internet provider.
Unless your device is connected to the internet through Wi-Fi
connection, the Software will access through your mobile
network, which may result in additional charges depending
on your payment plan. In addition, your enjoyment of some
features of the Software may be affected by the suitability
and performance of your device hardware or data access.
7. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer
must include all of the Software (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.
8. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.
You agree to comply with all applicable international and
national laws that apply to the Software, including all the
applicable export restriction laws and regulations.
9. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the
Warranty Information
238
terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this
EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all
copies, full or partial, of the Software.
10. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED
IN A WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY
ACCOMPANYING YOUR DEVICE, ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED
BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE (WHETHER
INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE, DOWNLOADED, OR
OTHERWISE OBTAINED) IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN
"AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND
FROM SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE
LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS,
IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,
ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER
VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION,
WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM
239
SAMSUNG OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER
THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING
THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY
SORT FROM SAMSUNG.
11. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this
mobile device. Samsung makes no representations
whatsoever about any of these applications. Since Samsung
has no control over such applications, you acknowledge and
agree that Samsung is not responsible for the availability of
such applications and is not responsible or liable for any
content, advertising, products, services, or other materials
on or available from such applications. You expressly
acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is
at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory
quality, performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up
to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select
to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses,
and other items of a destructive nature. References on this
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you,
and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship,
or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its
products and services. You agree that Samsung shall not be
responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or
loss, including but not limited to any damage to the mobile
device or loss of data, caused or alleged to be caused by, or
in connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party
content, products, or services available on or through any
such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of
any third-party application is governed by such third party
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement,
Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any
information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly
or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will
be subject to such third party application provider's privacy
policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY
RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR
ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION
PROVIDER. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL
INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY
APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH
PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD
PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.
12. SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS. Certain Samsung applications
and services may be included with, or downloaded to, this
mobile device. Many of them require Samsung Services
membership registration ("Samsung Account"), and your
rights and obligations will be set forth in separate Samsung
Account terms and conditions and privacy policies. There are
non-Samsung Account applications and services that require
your consent to their separate terms and conditions and
privacy policies. You expressly acknowledge and agree that
your use of such applications and services will be subject to
the applicable terms and conditions and privacy policies.
13. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR
RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS
CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS,
OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE
TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES,
AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF
SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR
LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING
Warranty Information
240
THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL
LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF
ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON
THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS
EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID
SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS
MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS,
EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 10,
11, 12 AND 13) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY
FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
14. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"
and "commercial software documentation" with only those
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the
terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only
with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted
to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.
241
15. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of
the jurisdiction where you are a resident or, if a resident of
the United States, by the laws of the state of Texas, without
regard to its conflict of law provisions. This EULA shall not be
governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is
expressly excluded.
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or
difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of
the Software is not amicably settled, it shall be subject to the
non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction
where you are a resident. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
Samsung may apply for injunctive remedies (or an equivalent
type of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE
SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH
FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR
JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or
consolidated with any other person's or entity's claim or
dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall
be conducted according to the American Arbitration
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes
that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator
shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this
arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small
Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as
part of any award, but may not grant Samsung its attorney
fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that
the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case,
you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total
administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such
fees, whichever is less, and Samsung shall pay the
remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator
fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims,
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed
$5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to
AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to
the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties,
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs.
Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any
court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also
applies to claims against Samsung's employees,
representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from
the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this
dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung
no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first
consumer purchaser's purchase of this device. To opt out,
you must send notice by e-mail to
optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: "Arbitration
Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was
purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you
have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on
the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which
can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of
the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;
and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not
Warranty Information
242
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling
1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the
date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the
device and providing the same information. These are the
only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of
this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute
resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or
its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the
benefits of this license.
17. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral
or written communications, proposals and representations
with respect to the Software or any other subject matter
covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to
be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions
shall continue in full force and effect. [090413]
243
Section 12: Samsung Product Registration
Sign Up Now
Customize your Samsung device experience
• Activate product warranty
• Access to a personalized My Samsung Mobile account
• No monthly fees
Get More
• Latest info on promotions, events and special offers on related products
• Review Samsung products and share your opinion
• Great deals on downloads
Register now at
www.samsung.com/register
Scan this code to go
directly to the registration page.
Samsung Product Registration
244
Index
A
Abc mode 45
About Device 136
Accounts 124
Action Memo 163
S Pen 19
Add accounts 124
Adding a New Contact
Idle Screen 62
Address Book 61
Adding a New Contact 62
Adding Pauses to Contact
Numbers 63
Copying a contact to the Phone 72
Copying Contacts to Phone 72
Copying Contacts to SIM Card 71
Deleting Address Book Entries 73
Deleting Contacts from SIM card
72
Dialing a Number 64
Favorites 71
Finding an Address Book Entry 64
245
Group Settings 69
Managing Address Book Contacts
71
Service Dialing Numbers 73
Using Contacts List 64
Address Book Options 67
Adobe PDF 188
Air Command 122
Activation 120
On 122
Toolbar 19
Air Gesture
Activate 120
Air Browse 121
Air Call-Accept 121
Air Jump 121
On 120
Quick Glance 121, 122, 124
Air View 120, 121
On 121
Airplane mode 89
Alarm 170
AllShare Play
see Samsung Link 194, 196
Android Beam 94
Applications
Using the Camcorder 81
Using the Camera 74
World Clock 171
Applications settings
managing 128
running services 129
AT&T Code Scanner 165
AT&T DriveMode 165
AT&T FamilyMap 166
AT&T Music
Playlists 183
AT&T Navigator 166
AT&T Ready2Go 12
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi 157
Audio Output 97
B
Back key 28
Backing up your data 125
Backup and Reset 125
Battery
charging 9
Installing 7
Low Battery Indicator 11
Show Display Percentage 99
Battery Use & Safety 216
Bigger Font
Setting 104
Blocking Mode 111
On 111
Bluetooth
Outgoing Headset Condition 107
Sending contacts 160
Books
Play Books 186
Brightness
Adjusting 98
C
Calculator 167
Calendar 168
Call Functions 49
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)
58
Address Book 51
Adjusting the Call Volume 55
Answering a Call 52
Call Back Missed Call 53
Call Duration 55
Call Log 53
Call Waiting 59
Correcting the Number 50
Dialing a Recent Number 50
Ending a Call 50
International Call 49
Making a Call 49
Manual Pause Dialing 49
Options During a Call 55
Putting a Call on Hold 57
Saving a recent call number to
Address Book 53
Searching for a Number in
Address Book 59
Using the Speakerphone 58
Call rejection 106
Call Settings 105
Call Sound
Personalize 56
Camcorder 81
Settings 77
Shooting Video 81
Camcorder Options
Camcorder Options after a Video is
Taken 82
Camera
Modes 76
Quick Settings 77
Settings 77
Taking Pictures 74
Care and Maintenance 221
Changing Your Settings 85
Charging battery 9
ChatON 152
Children and Cell Phones 211
246
Chrome 170
Clock 170
Code Scanner 165
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS) 147, 214
Configuring your Phone 12
Contacts 61
Creating a Playlist 183
D
Device Health 173
Dialing Options 52
Display
icons 24
Using Negative Colors 104
Display / Touch-Screen 219
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
207
Downloads 173
Draft Messages 140
DriveMode 165
Dual Camera 75
Dual View 75
247
E
Easy Mode 103
Editing a Picture 79
Email 147
Creating a Corporate Email
Account 148
Creating Additional Email
Accounts 148
Switching Between Email
Accounts 149
Emergency Calls 220
Making 50
With SIM 50
Without SIM 50
Entering Text 44
Changing the Text Entry Mode 45
Using 123Sym Mode 46
Using Abc Mode 45
Using Swype 47
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 46
Exercising
Before You Start 188
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals 207
F
Facebook
Personalize 114
Predictive Text 114
Family Map 166
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices 226
FCC Notice and Cautions 228
Featured Apps 174
Flipboard 173
Font 102
Size 102
Style 102
Font Size
Changing 104
G
Gallery 82
viewing pictures 82
viewing videos 83
Gestures 120
Browse Image 30
Direct call 30
Mute/pause 30
Overview 29
Getting Started 6
Setting Up Your Phone 6
Voice mail 13
Gmail 149
Personalize 114
Google
Settings 174
Google Chrome 170
Google Maps 180
Google Voice Typing 47
Google voice typing settings 116
Google+
Settings 174
GPS 220
Group
Adding a contact 69
Editing 70
Removing a contact 69
Group Settings
Editing a Caller Group 70
H
Hands-free Mode 118
Handwriting feature 47
Hangouts 175
Health and Safety Information 207
Help 176
Home key 28
Hotspots 88, 90, 91
I
Icons
Application 163
Indicator 24
Icons, description 24
In-Call Options 55
Incognito 178
Create Window 178
Exit Window 178
Increase touch sensitivity 124
International Call 49
Internet 176
K
Keyboard Input Methods 112
Keyboard settings 112
Keypad
Changing Text Input 45
Kies via Wi-Fi 88
L
Landscape 45
Language and input 111
Language and keyboard settings
select locale 111
Linking Contacts 65
Location services 90
Location services settings 100
Lock Screen
Say Wake-Up Command 101
Shortcuts 100
Lookout Security 179
248
M
Maps 180
Memory Card 43
Memory Card Installation 7
Menu
key 28
Menu Navigation 28
Message Search 144
Messaging 139
Adding a Signature 145
Block Unknown Senders 146
Creating and Sending Text
Messages 139
Deleting a message 144
Draft 140
Gmail 149
Handwriting 47
Locked 141
Options 140
Scheduled Messages 141
Settings 144
Signing into Email 147
Signing into Gmail 149
Spam 141
249
Translate Text 142
Types of Messages 139
Messaging Options 140
Messenger 151, 181
microSD card 7, 43
Installing 8
Removing 8
microSDHC card 7, 43
Mobile Hotspot 88
Mobile TV 181
Mobile Web 176
Entering Text in the Mobile Web
Browser 177
Using Bookmarks 178
Mono
Audio Setup 105
Motion
Activate 122
Air Command 122
Air View 121
Browse Image 123
Direct Call 123
High Touch Sensitivity 124
Mute/Pause 123
On 122
Smart Alert 123
Smart Screen 124
Zoom 123
Multi Window
Activate/Deactivate 32
Activation 99
Close App 36
Custom Preset 36
Customizing 33
Increase App Window Size 36
Panel Relocation 33
Rearrange Apps 33
Removing Apps 34
Restoring Apps 34
Running Multiple Apps 34
Tab Repositioning 33
Using 32
Music 182
Making a Song a Ringtone 183
Playing Music 183
Music Extensions 182
Music Player 182
adding music 183
creating a playlist 183
removing music 183
Mute 56, 59
My Files 184
My Magazine 184
Navigation 184
myAT&T 185
N
Navigation
command keys 28
context-sensitive menus 29
terms used 28
touch gestures 28
Navigator 166
Nearby devices 94
Negative Colors 104
NFC
On 83
Noise Reduction 56
Notification Panel 42
Customizing Quick Access 103
O
Operating Environment 224
Other Important Safety Information
229
P
Paired Windows
Multi Window Preset 36
Palm Motion
Activate 123
Capture Screen 123
Mute/Pause 123
On 123
PC Connections 161
Pen Window 21
Personal Localized Alerting Network
(PLAN) 147, 214
Phone
Front View 15
icons 24
Rear View 17
Side View 16
Switching On/Off 11
Photo
Editing 79
Picture
Color Correction 80
Face Corrections 80
Frame 80
Pictures 82
Gallery 82
Sharing 83
Pictures and Videos 74
Places 186
Play Books 186
Play Music 187
Play Store 187
Pointer speed 117
Polaris Office 5 188
Power
Auto Adjust Screen Tone 98
Power Saving
LCD Adjustment 98
Power Saving Mode 130
Powering
Off 11
On 11
Privacy settings
factory data reset 126
250
Q
QWERTY keypad 45
R
Reading Mode 98
Red Eye
Correction 80
Reducing Exposure
Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories 210
Reject list 54
Reset
factory data 126
Responsible Listening 222
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile device 228
Ringtone
Making a Song a Ringtone 183
S
S Beam 94
On 83
Sharing Multiple Pictures 84
Sharing Pictures 83
251
S Finder
Using S Pen 20
S Note 189
S Pen
Kepper Notification 119
Settings 119
S Translator 190
S Voice 190
Samsung Apps 191
Samsung Hub
Creating a New Account 191
Using 192
Samsung Keyboard
Keyboard Swipe 113
Reset Settings 113
Samsung Link
Configuring Settings 196
Definitions 194
Sharing Media 197
Samsung Mobile Products and
Recycling 218
scientific calculator 168
Scrapbook
Copy Using S Pen 22
Using S Pen 20
Screen Capture 123
Screen Rotation
Auto-Rotate 99
Screen Shots
Selective 21
Screen Timeout 98
Screen Write
Using S Pen 20
SD Card 43
Security settings
device administration 133
trusted credentials 135
Sensitivity
Touch Sensitivity 120
Service Dialing Numbers 73
Settings 77, 85
SIM card
installation 7
Installing 6
SketchBook for Galaxy 198
Smart Clip
Using 21
Smart Practices While Driving 214
Smart Screen 120, 124
On 124
Smart Switch 14
Smart Wi-Fi 157
Snooze 171
Software Update 137
Spam
Block Unknown Senders 146
Settings 146
Spam Messages 141
Assigning 141
Speakerphone Key 58
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
Certification Information 212
Standard Limited Warranty 231
Stopwatch 172
Swap 57
SwiftKeyFlow
Samsung Keyboard 113
SWYPE
entering text using 47
Swype
Cellular Data 115
Swype Keypad Settings 114
Swype Settings 48
Symbol/Numeric mode 46
Synchronization settings
auto-sync 100
Synchronizing Accounts 125
T
Tethering 88
Text Input
Abc mode 45
Methods 44
numeric mode 46
symbol mode 46
Timer 172
Automatic Answering 107
Touch Screen 11
Lock/Unlock 11
Transferring Large Files 83
Translate 142
Translator 190
Travel Charger 9
Using 9
TTY Mode 110
Twitter
Predictive Text 114
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 219
Understanding Your Phone 14
Features of Your Phone 14
Front View 15
Rear View 17
Side Views 16
Unmute 56
USB settings
mass storage device 162
USB Tethering 88
Using Favorites
Adding Favorites 178
Deleting a Favorite 179
Editing Favorites 179
V
Video Player 199
Voice control 117
Voice Mail
Accessing 13
From Another Phone 13
252
Setup 13
Voice Recorder 200
Volume 95
W
Warranty Information 231
WatchON 201
Adding a New Room 205
Changing Channels 203
Configure Just For You 204
Customizing Your Remote 202
Initial Configuration 201
Locating Programs 204
Personalize 204
Settings 204
Using 203
Web 176
Widgets
Gmail 174
Settings 198
Voice Recorder 200
253
Wi-Fi 153
Wi-Fi Direct 86, 156
Wi-Fi Settings 86
World clock 171
Deleting an Entry 172
Y
YouTube 205
YPmobile (Yellowpages mobile) 206